all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 5.67 MiB | / December 02 2014 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.36 MiB | / December 02 2014 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | / December 02 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | / December 02 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Internal Photos | / December 02 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | / December 02 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | / December 02 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | / December 02 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Internal Photos | / December 02 2014 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report |
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 5.67 MiB | / December 02 2014 |
A N D R O I D S M A R T P H O N E User Manual Please read this manual before operating your phone and keep it for future reference. GH68_3XXXXA Printed in Korea By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the Phone System), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software, computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers. Open Source Software Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com. Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING USC_SCH-R890_UM_Eng_MG3_CH_081313_D3 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS. Modification of Software SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS, OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE. USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS. SAFE (Samsung Approved For Enterprise) SAFE: "SAFE" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more information about Samsung's SAFE program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe. Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE DEVICES. In addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider, solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab devices are sold. [101212]
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive Richardson, TX 75082 Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd. Plano, TX 75074 Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357) By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Internet Address:
http://www.samsung.com 2013 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:
www.samsung.com/us/support The Bluetooth word mark, figure mark (stylized B Design), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and B Design) are registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG. Nuance, VSuite, T9 Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries. microSD, microSDHC and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association. Adobe and Flash are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p, including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in License settings under Settings > More >
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential About device > Legal information > License settings. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. LTE is a trademark of ETSI. Google, the Google logo, Google Search, Gmail, Maps, Navigation, Places, Google Talk, YouTube, Picasa, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google, Inc. Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC (Samsung). Samsung and Super AMOLED are both trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and/or its related entities. All product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Screen images simulated. Appearance of the phone may vary. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Table of Contents Section 1: Getting Started .......................... 7 Understanding this User Manual . 7 Battery Cover . 8 Battery . 12 Extending Your Battery Life . 16 Initial Device Configuration . 16 Switching the Device On or Off . 19 Restarting the Device . 19 Locking and Unlocking the Device . 19 Creating a New Google Account . 20 Signing into Your Google Account . 20 Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location . 21 Creating a Samsung Account . 21 Voicemail . 22 Task Manager . 23 Google Now . 25 Section 2: Understanding Your Phone ..... 26 Features . 26 Front View . 27 Back View . 28 Side Views . 29 Device Display . 30 Status Bar . 30 Function Keys . 38 Home Screen . 38 Applications . 41 Screen Navigation . 42 Menu Navigation . 44 Customizing the Screens . 46 Section 3: Call Functions and Contacts List ........................................52 Displaying Your Phone Number . 52 Making a Call . 52 Ending a Call . 53 Making Emergency Calls . 54 Dialing Options . 55 Answering a Call . 56 1 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Managing Reject Calls . 56 International Calls . 57 Pause Dialing . 58 Wait Dialing . 58 Redialing the Last Number . 59 Speed Dialing . 59 In Call Options . 61 Using S Voice . 67 Logs Tab . 68 Section 4: Entering Text ............................72 Text Input Methods . 72 Selecting the Text Input Method . 72 Entering Text Using Swype . 73 Using the Samsung Keyboard . 77 Using the Google Voice Typing . 80 Section 5: Accounts and Contacts ...........82 Accounts . 82 Contacts List . 82 Finding a Contact . 86 Contact List Options . 89 Contact Menu Options . 90 Contact Entry Options . 91 2 Linking Contact Information . 91 Sending a Namecard . 94 Copying Contact Information . 95 Synchronizing Contacts . 96 Display Options . 97 Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync .98 Additional Contact Options . 99 Groups . 100 The Favorites Tab . 103 Section 6: Messages ...............................104 Types of Messages . 104 Creating and Sending Messages . 105 Message Options . 106 Viewing Newly Received Messages . 110 Deleting Messages . 112 Message Search . 113 Messaging Settings . 113 Assigning Messages as Spam . 116 Accessing Your Spam Folder . 118 Text Templates . 118 Using Email . 118 Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook) . 124 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using Google Mail . 130 Hangouts . 132 Google + . 132 Messenger . 133 Section 7: Multimedia ............................ 134 Assigning the Default Storage Location . 134 Using the Camera . 135 Camera Options . 136 Quick Settings . 138 Camera and Camcorder Settings . 139 Using the Camcorder . 143 Sharing Pictures . 145 Editing a Photo . 151 The Gallery . 153 AllShare Cast Hub . 154 Section 8: Applications and Widgets ..... 156 Accessing Applications . 156 Applications List . 158 Camera . 160 ChatON . 161 Chrome . 161 City ID . 162 Clock . 162 Contacts . 165 Downloads . 165 Dropbox . 166 Email . 168 Flipboard . 168 Gallery . 169 Gmail . 169 Google . 169 Google Settings . 169 Google + . 170 Group Play . 170 Hangouts . 172 Help . 172 Local . 173 Maps . 173 Messages . 176 Messenger . 176 Music . 177 Using Playlists . 180 Creating a Playlist . 180 Transferring Music Files . 181 3 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Removing Music Files . 181 My Files . 181 Navigation . 183 Phone . 185 Play Books . 185 Play Magazines . 186 Play Movies & TV . 186 Play Music . 187 Play Store . 194 Downloading a New Google Application . 194 Launching an Installed Google Application . 196 POLARIS Office 5 . 197 S Memo . 197 S Translator . 199 S Voice . 200 Samsung Apps . 201 Samsung Hub . 201 Samsung Link . 204 Settings . 207 Story Album . 207 TripAdvisor . 207 Video . 208 4 Voice Recorder . 208 Voice Search . 209 VPN Client . 210 WatchON . 210 YouTube . 215 Section 9: Connections ...........................216 Wi-Fi . 216 Bluetooth . 218 Enable Downloading for Web Applications . 224 PC Connections . 224 USB Tethering . 225 Mobile HotSpot . 226 Section 10: Settings ................................229 Accessing Settings . 229 Wi-Fi Settings . 230 Data Usage . 236 More Networks . 236 VPN . 238 Lock Screen . 241 Display Settings . 247 Sound Settings . 249 Home Screen Mode . 251 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Call Settings . 252 Blocking Mode . 255 Driving Mode . 256 Power Saving Mode . 256 Accessory . 257 Accessibility Settings . 257 Language and Input Settings . 259 Motions and gestures . 265 Smart screen . 266 Voice control . 267 Add Account . 267 Backing up to the Cloud . 268 Backup and Reset . 269 Backing up Your Data Before Factory Reset . 270 Location Services . 273 Security . 274 Application Manager . 276 Battery Usage . 279 SD Card & Device Storage . 279 Date and Time . 281 About Device . 281 Software Update . 282 Section 11: Health and Safety Information .. 284 Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . 284 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . 289 FCC Part 15 Information to User . 291 Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) . 291 Smart Practices While Driving . 292 Battery Use and Safety . 293 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . 295 UL Certified Travel Charger . 296 Display / Touch-Screen . 296 GPS . 297 Emergency Calls . 297 Care and Maintenance . 298 Responsible Listening . 299 Operating Environment . 301 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for Wireless Devices . 303 Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device . 305 FCC Notice and Cautions . 305 5 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Other Important Safety Information . 306 Section 12: Warranty Information ..........308 Standard Limited Warranty . 308 End User License Agreement for Software . 313 Index .........................................................321 6 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 1: Getting Started This section allows you to quickly start using your Samsung GALAXY S4 Mini phone by installing the SIM and microSD cards, installing and charging the battery, activating your service, and setting up your voicemail account. Understanding this User Manual The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your phone. A robust index for features begins on page 321. Also included is important safety information that you should know before using your phone. Most of this information is near the back of the guide, beginning on page 284. This manual gives navigation instructions according to the default display settings. If you select other settings, navigation steps may be different. Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual assume that you are starting from the Home screen. To get to the Home screen, you may need to unlock the phone or keypad. ( For more information, refer to Security on page 290.) Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and may vary from your phone, depending on the software version on your phone, and any changes to the phones Settings. Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start with the phone unlocked, at the Home screen. All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays may vary, depending on the software version of your phone and any changes to the phones Settings. Getting Started 7 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Special Text In this manual, youll find text that is set apart from the rest. These are intended to point out important information, share quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more. The definitions for these methods are as follows:
Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or sub-menu.
Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.
Example: Gives an example of the feature or procedure.
Important: Points out important information about the current feature that could affect performance.
Warning: Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone. Text Conventions This manual provides condensed information about how to use your phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions are used to represent often-used steps:
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting successive options in longer, or repetitive, procedures. Example: Press Home, then touch Menu Settings Connections Wi-Fi. Battery Cover The battery, micro SIM card and SD card are installed under the battery cover. Important! Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure the device is switched off. To turn the device off, hold down the key until the power-off image displays, then tap Power off. 8 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively during installation or removal. Doing so may damage the cover. To remove the battery cover:
1. Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch (1). 2. Place your fingernail in the opening (2) and firmly pop the cover off the device (similar to a soda can). Release Latch To replace the battery cover:
Position the battery cover over the battery compartment and press down until you hear a click. Getting Started 9 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential SIM Card Overview Important! Before removing or replacing the micro SIM card, make sure the device is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down the key until the power-off image displays, then tap Power off. The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your telephone number, PIN, available optional services, and many other features. Important! The micro SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by scratching or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small children. Some features on your device (such as Wi-Fi Calling) can be unlocked by using the new micro SIM card. To use this new micro SIM card, call or contact Customer Service for more information. This card contains the necessary information for identifying and authenticating the user to the IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem). 10 Installing and Removing the SIM card This device uses a different type of SIM card called a micro SIM. Other larger SIM cards will not function or fit within this slot. To install the SIM card:
1. Carefully slide the micro SIM card into the SIM card socket until it clicks into place. Micro SIM card 2. Make sure that the cards gold contacts face into the phone and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned as shown. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To remove the micro SIM card:
1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the micro SIM slot and push the card slightly out. 3. Carefully slide the card out of the micro SIM card Installing the microSD Memory Card Your device supports an optional (external) microSD memory cards for storage of media such as music, pictures, video and other files. The SD card is designed for use with this mobile device and other devices. socket. Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the device will not detect it and no service is available. If this happens, turn off the device, remove the card, and reinstall the card in the correct orientation. Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 4GB. microSDHC memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB. microSDXC memory card types can include capacities greater than 32GB. Note: This device supports a memory card of up to a 64GB. 1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the device. 3. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down. 4. Carefully slide the microSD card into the card socket until it clicks into place. Getting Started 11 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Battery Before using your device for the first time, install the battery and charge it fully. Important! Before removing or replacing the battery, make sure the device is switched off. To turn the device off, hold down the key until the power-off image displays, then tap Power off. Installing the Battery 1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone, making sure the connectors align. 2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2). Important! Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the phones contact pins. Removing the microSD Memory Card 1. Remove the battery cover. 2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card should pop partially out of the slot. 3. Remove the card from the slot. 4. Replace the battery cover. 12 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Removing the Battery Grip the battery at the top end (3) and lift it up and out of the battery compartment (4). Installing Battery Charging the Battery Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with your device. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your local Samsung dealer for further details. Before using your device for the first time, you must fully charge the battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4 hours. Charging Head Removing Battery USB Cable Getting Started 13 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger. If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is not installed, the handset will power cycle continuously and prevent proper operation. Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery, can cause the device to become damaged. Warning! While the device is charging, if the touch screen does not function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device. Important! It is recommended you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first time. 1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head. 2. Locate the Charger/Accessory jack. 3. Insert the USB cable into the devices Charger/
Accessory jack. 4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet. The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its charge state and percent of charge. 14 Note: If the charger is incorrectly connected, damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phones warranty. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 5. When charging is finished, first unplug the chargers power plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the chargers connector from the phone. Important! If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more information, refer to Standard Limited Warranty on page 324 Low Battery Indicator When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time remain (~15% charge), a warning tone sounds and the Battery low message repeats at regular intervals on the display. In this condition, your device conserves its remaining battery power, by dimming the backlight. When the battery level becomes too low, the device automatically turns off. The on-screen battery charge is represented (by default) as a colored battery icon. You can also choose to display a percentage value. Having a percentage value on-screen can provide a better idea of the remaining charge on the battery. Press and then tap Settings My device tab Display Show battery percentage. For more information, refer to Display Settings on page 256 Getting Started 15 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Extending Your Battery Life Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:
Reduce your backlight on time.
Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.
Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.
Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current location; each query drains your battery.
Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.
Turn off Automatic application sync.
Use the Power Saving feature to deactivate some hardware and interface functions.
Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions are consuming your battery resources.
Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications. 16
Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background applications that are still running. These minimized applications can, over time, cause your device to slow down.
Turn off any streaming services after use (see Running Services).
Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more power. Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or Gallery image. Initial Device Configuration 1. Select a language from the associated field. English is the default language. Note: If you are visually impaired or have difficulty hearing, tap Accessibility to configure the accessibility settings. 2. Tap Next. Note: You may be prompted with a notification that your activation is completed. 3. At the Wi-Fi screen, move the slider to activate the feature and connect to either an existing Wireless Access Point (WAP) or tap Next to continue. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. If prompted, assign the Date and time settings. Enable the Automatic date and time field, select a time zone, and tap Next.
If you disable the Automatic date and time feature, you can then manually assign this information. Note: The Date and time menu may not display if automatically detected via your internal microSIM card. 5. At the Samsung account screen, select one of the 7. following options:
If this is your first time, tap Create new account.
If you have previously created a Samsung account, tap Sign in. or Tap Skip to continue with the setup process and create an account later. For more information, refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 6. At the Got Google? screen, choose either Yes to log into your existing Google account or No to continue.
If you selected Yes, on the Sign in screen, enter your current
) Next. Google Email and Password information and tap (
Tap OK to agree to the Google legal agreements.
If prompted to enable purchases, tap Set up credit card and enter your credit card information and click Save.
Click Skip to continue without entering this information. If you indicated that you did not have a current Google account, then at the Make it Google screen, choose either Get an account to create a new account or Not now to continue. 8. Select/deselect the desired Google & location services and tap
(Next). Note: Enabling Google location services can drain battery power. Getting Started 17 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 9. When prompted, enter a First and Last name then tap 13. Accept the current device name.
(Next). This will help to identify this as your device. 10. When prompted with the Dropbox activation screen, you can choose to either: Create account, Sign in, Disclaimer, or tap Skip to continue. Note: For more information, refer to Dropbox on page 168 11. From the Learn about key features screen:
Tap an available field to display an on-screen tutorial.
Turn on a feature by sliding the activation slider to the ON position (
12. Tap Next. ONON
). or Tap the Device name field and use the on-screen keyboard to rename your device. Important! The device name is also used to provide an identification for your devices Bluetooth and Wi-Fi Direct names. 14. Tap Finish to complete the setup process. 15. Read the on-screen Collect diagnostics information. Note: This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device. 16. Select either More Info... (to read additional information) or Close to close the message screen. 18 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Important! Selecting Close only closes the current description screen and does not disable data collection. To disable data collection, go to Settings Accounts tab Collect diagnostics and turn off the Allow diagnostics to be collected feature. For more information, refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 288 Backup and reset Switching the Device On or Off Once the device has been configured, you will not be prompted with setup screens again. To turn the device on:
Press and hold
(Power/End) until the device switches on. The device searches for your network and after finding it, you can make or receive calls. Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the language, use the Language menu. For more information, refer to Language and Input Settings on page 275 To turn the device off:
1. Press and hold
(Power/End) until the Device options screen displays. 2. Tap Power off (
). Restarting the Device 1. Press and hold
(Power/End) until the Device options screen displays. 2. Tap Restart (
). Locking and Unlocking the Device By default, the device screen locks when the backlight turns off. Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of the directions shown unlock the device. Note: You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use of your device. For more information, refer to Security on page 290. Getting Started 19 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Creating a New Google Account You should create a Google Account when you first use your device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This account provides access to several device features such as Gmail, Hangouts, and the Google Play Store applications. Before you are able to access Google applications, you must enter your account information. These applications sync between your device and your online Google account. To create a new Google Account from your device:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Read the introduction and tap New to begin. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Google
(Play Store). Signing into Your Google Account 1. Launch an application that requires a Google account
(such as Play Store or Gmail). 2. Click Existing. 3. Tap the Email and Password fields and enter your information. 4. Tap
(Sign in). Your device communicates with the 5. Google servers to confirm your information. If prompted, you can enable the option to stay up to date on news and offers, then tap OK. Account. or If this is not the first time you are starting the device, tap
(Gmail). Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in. 20 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location Although the device is configured to store new pictures and videos to the Memory card, it is a very good idea to confirm this location before using your device. Important! Too many users can overlook this storage 4. Press to return to the Home screen. Creating a Samsung Account Just as important as setting up and activating a Google account to help provide access to Play Store, etc.. An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing applications such as Samsung Hub. destination until something goes wrong. It is recommended that you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features. Note: The Samsung account application will manage your access to the previously mentioned applications, and there is no longer a need to remember different passwords for each application. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap
(Settings) 2. Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap Settings Accounts tab. Camera. 2. Press and then tap Settings and scroll up to the Storage entry. 3. Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos. Choose from: Device or Memory card. Note: It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card. 3. Add account Samsung account. If you have previously created a Samsung account, tap Sign in. or If this is your first time, tap Create new account. Getting Started 21 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Note: You may be prompted to confirm your credentials via email. 5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to verify your account via the provided email address. Note: Without confirming your email address and following the documented procedures, related applications will not function properly since it is Samsung account that is managing their username and password access. Voicemail Setting Up Your Voicemail Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as your battery is charged and the micro SIM card inserted, activate your voicemail account. Important! Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access. For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voice mail:
Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network. 1. From the Home screen, tap and then touch and hold the You may be prompted to enter a password. key until the device dials voicemail. 2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a display name. 22 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Accessing Your Voicemail You can access your Voicemail by either pressing and holding on the keypad, or by using the phones Application icon, then tapping the Voicemail application. To access Voice Mail using the menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap and then touch and hold until the device dials voicemail. Note: Touching and holding will launch the voicemail application. 2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voicemail center. Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone 1. Dial your wireless phone number. 2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk key on the phone you are using. 3. Enter your passcode. Task Manager Your device can run applications simultaneously, with some applications running in the background. Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time, and the biggest reason for this are background applications. These are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see which of these applications are still active in the background but also easily lets you choose which applications are left running and which are closed. Note: The larger the number of applications running on your phone, the larger the energy drain on your battery. Getting Started 23 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Task Manger Overview Shutting Down an Currently Active Application Press and hold
(Home) and then tap Press and hold
(Home) and then tap
(End all) or 1. Press and hold
(Task manager).
(Home) and then tap 2. From the Active applications tab, tap End to close selected applications. or Tap End all to close all background running applications.
(Task manager). This screen contains the following tabs:
Active applications display those currently active applications running on your phone.
Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from the Play Store that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove them from your phone.
RAM, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear Memory.
Clear defaults allows you to clear which applications are launched by default.
Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space within the System storage and external SD card. 24 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Google Now Google Now recognizes a users repeated actions performed on the device (including access of common locations, repeated calendar appointments, search queries, etc.). This information is then used to display more relevant information to the user in the form of cards. These scrollable on-screen cards are displayed when the Google Now application is launched. These cards are not manually added. The service uses your GPS, Google Search, and usage information to generate these cards automatically. To initially set up Google Now:
1. Press and hold
(Google Now).
(Home) and then tap 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to review the available information. 3. When prompted, agree to launch the application. Some initial on-screen cards are shown. A default is the Weather card that provides updated weather information in your area. To configure the Google Now settings:
1. Press and hold 2. Press 3. Access each desired Settings page and configure it as and select Settings.
(Google Now). and then tap desired. When these condition are met, new card information starts to display in the Google Now list of cards. Getting Started 25 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 2: Understanding Your Phone Features
Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard
Brilliant 4-inch WVGA screen (480x800)
Delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network technology by using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access Plus
(HSPA+).
Android 4.2.2, Jelly Bean Platform
Smart Switch compliant. For more information, see www.samsungsmartswitch.com
Wi-Fi Capability
Apps available to download from the Google Play Store and Samsung Apps
Access Movies, TV Shows, Music, Games, and Books with Samsung Hub
Compliant with AllShare Cast Hub
5 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus and digital zoom
VGA Front Facing camera for Video Chat
Share Shot picture sharing functionality 26
S-Beam file transfer technology
Share Shot camera sharing-capable via multi-connect Wi-Fi Direct connection
Bluetooth enabled
NFC-compatible
Full Integration of Google Mobile Services (Gmail, YouTube, Google Maps, Google Voice Search)
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging and Google Hangouts
Corporate and Personal Email
Music Player with multitasking features
Music Player (AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, MP3, and WMA)
Speakerphone
Support for microSD and microSDHC Memory Cards up to 64GB capacity
Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Play Books and Play Magazines
Assisted GPS (Google Navigation)
Webkit-based browser By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Expandable memory slot - supports up to 64GB microSD
Mobile HotSpot and USB Tethering-capability
Video Chat via Google Hangouts
Google Play Music
Wi-Fi Calling via the use of a micro SIM card Front View 1 10 2 3 4 5 9 8 6 1 7 Understanding Your Phone 27 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 1. Earpiece: Use during calls to listen to callers. 2. LED Indicator: Flashes or glows to alert you to alert notifications or phone status. 3. Menu Key: Press to display options for the current screen. 4. Home Key: Press to display the Home screen, or Lock screen if the phone is locked. Press and hold to display recent applications or to launch Task Manager. 5. Microphone: Use during calls to allow callers to hear your voice, and when recording. 6. Back Key: Press to return to the previous screen or option. 7. 2 Megapixel Front Camera: Use for taking pictures and recording video. 8. Proximity and Light Sensors: Detect the presence of nearby objects to control device functions or blank the screen display, such as when you hold the phone to your ear during a phone call. Detect ambient light to determine screen brightness when Brightness is set to Automatic brightness (see Adjusting Screen Brightness on page 248), and when taking pictures with the Front camera. Back View The following illustration shows the external elements of your device:
1. Camera lens is used to take photos. 2. Flash is used to take photos in low-light conditions. 3. External speaker allows you to hear ringers, music, and other sounds offered by your phone. 4. microSD Card Slot (internal) allows you use a microSD card to expand the memory of your device. 28 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 3 2 1 Side Views The following illustration shows the side elements of your device:
5 1 2 4 5. Headset jack allows you to connect a hands-free headset so you can listen to music. 1. Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice volume during a call. When receiving an incoming call:
Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone. 2. Power/End key ends a call or switches the phone off and on. Press and hold for two seconds to turn toggle the Silent mode or Airplane mode states, turn the device on or off, or Restart. Understanding Your Phone 29 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Device Display Your display provides information about the devices status, and is the interface to manage features. The display indicates your connection status, signal strength, battery status and time. Icons display at the top of the device when an incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a specified time when an alarm was set. The screen also displays notifications, and Application (or shortcut) bar with five primary shortcuts: Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet, and Apps. Display settings In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight. From the Home screen, tap Apps My device tab
(Settings) Display. For more information, refer to Display Settings on page 256. My device My device Status Bar The Status Bar shows information about the connection status, signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays notifications about incoming messages, calls and other actions. This list identifies the icons you see on your phones display screen:
Indicator Icons This list identifies the symbols youll see on your devices display and Indicator area:
Note: Some Notification icons can be hidden manually by toggling the status of the Notification panel function. For more information, refer to Accessing Additional Screen Functions on page 37 Displays your current signal strength. The greater the number of bars, the stronger the signal. Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You cannot send or receive any calls or access online information. 30 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Indicates there is no signal available. Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone. Displays when there is a system error or alert. Displays to indicate a security warning. You are prompted to set a screen lock password. Displays when a call is in progress. Icon is displayed in the Status bar area. Displays when a call is on hold. Icon displays in the Status bar area. Displays when an active call is routed through a Bluetooth headset. Icon displays in the Status bar area. Displays when you have missed an incoming call. Displays when you device is set to automatically reject all incoming calls. The All numbers option is enabled from within Call settings Call rejection Auto reject mode menu. Displays when the speakerphone is on. Icon displays in the Status bar area. Displays when the microphone is muted. Icon displays in the Status bar area. Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward. Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized. For more information, refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 265 Displays your current battery charge level. Icon shown is fully charged. Displays when the current battery is 100 percent charged and the Display battery percentage option is enabled within the Settings My device tab Display menu. Displays your battery is currently charging. Understanding Your Phone 31 100%100%
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Displays your current battery charge level is low (Charge: ~28% - 15%). Displays your current battery charge level is very low (Charge: ~15% - 5%). Shows your current battery only has up to 4%
power remaining and will soon shutdown.
(Charge: ~4% - 1%). Displays when your connection to an EDGE network is active. Displays when your phone is communicating with the EDGE network. Displays when your connection to a UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active. Displays when your phone is communicating with the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network. Displays when your connection to a 4G LTE network is active. Displays when the phone has detected an active USB connection and is in a USB Debugging mode. 32 Displays when there is a new text message. Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to be delivered. Displays when an incoming text message content has failed to be downloaded. Displays when there is a new voicemail message. Displays in the notifications window when there is a new Email message. Displays in the notifications window when there is a new Gmail message. Displays when a new Google+ notification has been received. Displays when the user is prompted to set up a new Dropbox account. Displays when the user is prompted with a Lookout Security notification. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event has arrived. For more information, refer to Calendar on page 161 Displays when an alarm is set. For more information, refer to Setting an Alarm on page 164 Displays when the device is in Silent mode. All sounds except media and alarms are silenced, and Silent mode is set to Vibrate. For more information, refer to Silent mode via Device Options Screen on page 257 Displays when the device is in Silent mode. All sounds are silenced, and Silent mode is set to Mute. Displays when data synchronization and application sync is active and synchronization is in progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts. Displays when the Blocking mode feature is active. For more information, refer to Blocking Mode on page 271 Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and enabled. Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active and communicating with an external device. Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in progress. Displays when a file or application download is in progress. Displays when the Share shot option is enabled from within the Camera Shooting mode menu and images and being shared via Wi-Fi Direct. For more information, refer to Camera Options on page 141 Displays when a screen capture has been taken and stored in the clipboard. Displays when your device is connected being used to control streaming media and is connected to a Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified devices. Understanding Your Phone 33 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Displays when your device is currently sharing/
streaming media to paired device using the Samsung Link application. Displays when AllShare Cast Hub is active, connected to your device, and communicating. For more information, refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 158. Displays when updates are available for download. Displays when a Play Store download has completed. Displays when Hangout updates are available for download. For more information, refer to Hangouts on page 137. Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP). Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network. 34 Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode. Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is communicating with another compatible device. Displays to alert you to disable an active Wi-Fi Direct connection if not in use - to conserve battery power. Displays when the USB Tethering mode is active and communicating. For more information, refer to USB Tethering on page 229. Displays when Wi-Fi is being used as a Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating. For more information, refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 230. Displays when a share shot has been established with other users via a Wi-Fi Direct connection. Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active. Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi network count against available rate plan minutes. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Displays when you are currently in Emergency calling mode. You must exit this mode to resume normal calling function. Displays in the notifications window when there are too many on-screen notification icons to display. Tap to show more notifications. Tap to select a text input method. Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Music application. Displays in the notifications window when a song is currently playing within the Play Music application. Displays when your devices GPS is on and communicating. Displays when the external SD card (internal microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted) from the phone and is now ready for either removal or formatting. Displays when the External SD card is being prepared for mounting to the device. This is required for communication with the External SD card. Displays when the microSD card has been improperly or unexpectedly removed. Displays when storage within either the internal location or the external SD card has reached its capacity. It is recommended you either move files off or delete them to make additional room. Displays when Power saving mode is enabled. Displays when the Power saving alert notification has been activated. You are then prompted to view your current battery level. Displays when TTY device has been inserted. Displays when the Driving Mode is active. For more information, refer to Driving Mode on page 271. Understanding Your Phone 35 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Notification Bar The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can expand this area to display the Notification screen that provides more detailed information about the current on-screen notification icons. 1. Touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel (1). 2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated application (2). Clearing Notifications 1. Touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel. 2. Tap Clear. The notifications are cleared from the panel. 36 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To customize the functions displayed:
1. From the Notification screen, tap
(Open Grid view) to display additional functions. 2. Tap
(Edit) then locate the Notifications panel area located at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen. 3. Touch and hold a desired function then drag it to the top row. Accessing Additional Screen Functions In addition to notifications, this screen also provides quick and ready access to device functions. These can be quickly activated or deactivated. Scrolling across a horizontal list of functions has been enhanced with an accessible Grid view. Note: You can select the function buttons you see at the top of the Notifications panel. Only 5 buttons are shown at any one time. The Grid view is the only way to view all functions. To activate the Grid view:
From the Notification panel, tap
(Open Grid view) to display additional functions. To minimize the Grid view:
From the Notification panel, tap
(Close Grid view) to show only your primary functions. Understanding Your Phone 37 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Function Keys Your device comes equipped with three main function keys that can be used on any screen: Home, Menu, and Back. Home Key The Home key (
(indicated by a white Home icon).
) takes you back to your Home screen Press and hold to launch the Recent apps/Task manager screen. For more information, refer to Accessing Recently-Used Applications on page 45
) activates an available menu function for Menu Key The Menu key (
the current screen or application. Back Key The Back key (
screen. If the on-screen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the keyboard.
) returns you to the previously active Home Screen The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on your phone. There are initially seven available panels, each populated with default shortcuts or applications. You can customize each of these panels. Connection Status Status Bar Notification area Status area Shortcuts Signal strength Battery status Time Widget Google Search Home Screen Primary Shortcuts 38 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Notification area displays those icons associated with end-user notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress), new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, Emails, and Text/MMS messages. These notifications display at the top-left of the screen (within the Status bar area) and display important user information. This information can be accessed by swiping down from the Status bar (page 36).
Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the device such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 4G/3G, Wi-Fi communication, battery levels, GPS, etc.
Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information about notifications and device status, and allows access to application Widgets.
Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen width to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other customization features. There are six available extended screens (panels) each of which may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens share the use of the five Primary Shortcuts. The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a white square. Up to seven (7) total screens are available. Note: Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all screens.
Google search is an on-screen Internet search engine powered by Google. Tap to access the Voice Actions feature where you can verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search. Tap
(Voice Actions) to launch the function from within this Google widget.
Widgets are self-contained on-screen applications (not shortcuts). These can be placed onto any of the available screens
(Home or extended).
Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as Camera, YouTube, Contacts, Phone, Email, Play Store, etc. These function the same as shortcuts on your computer. Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens, the majority can also be found within the Applications screens. The Application screens can be accessed by tapping Apps from the Primary shortcuts area. Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number of times. Understanding Your Phone 39 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Primary Shortcuts: are four shortcuts present throughout all of the available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or launch any of the following functions:
Phone (
) launches the phone-related screen functions
(Keypad, Logs, Favorites, and Contacts). Contacts (
) launches the Contacts-related screens
(Phone, Groups, Favorites, and Contacts). Messaging (
) launches the Messaging menu (create new messages or open an existing message string). Internet (
Apps launches the Applications page.
) launches the built-in Web browser. Apps to access the Applications screens.
Tap
While in the Applications screens, tap
(Back) to easily return to the Home screen. As you transition from screen to screen, a screen indicator
(located at the bottom) displays the currently active panel. 40 Home Screen Menu Settings When on the Home screen, press the following menu options:
Add apps and widgets allows you to quickly access the Widget and then select any of tab where you can then drag a selected widget to an available area on a selected screen.
Create folder allows you to create on-screen folders to help organize files of application shortcuts.
Set wallpaper allows you to assign the current wallpaper for the Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens. Choose from Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
Edit page allows you to add or remove extended screens from your device. You can have up to six extended screens (one Home screen and six Extended screens).
Search displays the Google Search box that you can use to search for a key term online.
Settings provides quick access to the devices settings menu. The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing and then tapping Settings.
Help displays the on-screen Help application. For more information, refer to Help on page 174 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Applications The Application menu provides quick access to the most frequently used applications. Applications display on each of the three panels on the Applications screens. Important! Once you log into your Google account. All previously downloaded apps should now be populated within the Application screens. Application Screen Menu Settings When on the Apps screen, the following menu options are available:
1. Press 2. Press Apps. and then tap and then select from the following options:
Play Store: provides quick access to the Play Store (page 208).
Edit: allows you to organize your current applications by moving them around the screen, edit or delete existing Apps folders.
Create folder: allows you to create an application folder where you can better organize and group desired apps.
Uninstall: allows you to uninstall a user-downloaded application. Only those applications that are not default to the device can be downloaded. Tap to remove the selected app.
Downloaded applications: allows you to filter the view of apps to only those applications that you have downloaded.
View type: allows you to customize the way the Apps menu listing is shown (page 48).
Share apps: allows you to share information about selected applications with external users (page 47).
Hide applications: allows you to specify which current applications are hidden from view in this menu. Once you have selected the apps, tap Done.
Show hidden applications: allows you to specify which previously hidden applications are can be made visible again for viewing in this menu. Once you have selected the apps, tap Done. 3. Press to return to the Home screen. Understanding Your Phone 41 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Screen Navigation Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate the features of your device and enter characters. The following conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation action in the procedures. Navigating Through the Screens The following terms describe the most common hardware and on-screen actions.
Press and hold: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and buttons to select or activate an item. For example: press the Navigation key to scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys require you to press and hold them to activate a feature, for example, you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the device.
Tap: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon to open the application. A light touch works best.
Touch and hold: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example:
touch and hold from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options. 42
Flick: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when flicking through contacts or a message list.
Swipe or slide: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the Home screen to scroll among the seven panels.
Drag: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target position.
Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard, or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.
Pinch: Pinch the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom out when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers inward to zoom out.)
Spread: Spread the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers outward to zoom in.) By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Note: These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order. For more information, refer to Customizing the Screens on page 46
Motion Navigation and Activation: The device comes equipped with the ability to assign specific functions to certain device actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope. Accessing Recently-Used Apps 1. Press and hold from any screen to open the recently-used applications window. 2. Tap an icon to open the selected application. or Tap or Tap to go to the Task manager. to go to Google Search. or Tap applications. to delete the record of all recently used Understanding Your Phone 43 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using Sub-Menus Sub-menus are available from within most screen and applications. 1. Press screen. A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the 2. Tap an available on-screen option. Sub-Menu items Menu Navigation You can tailor the devices range of functions to fit your needs using both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and features are accessed by scrolling through the available on-screen menus. Your device defaults with seven screens. Navigating Through the Application Menus There are three default Application Menu screens available. As you add more applications from the Play Store, more screens are created to house these new apps. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps. The first Application Menu screen displays.
To close the Applications screen, press
(Home). 2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus. 3. Tap any of the on-screen icons to launch the associated application. 44 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using Context Menus Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to menu options that display when you right click your mouse on your desktop computer. Touch and hold an item on-screen to open its context Accessing Recently-Used Applications 1. Press and hold to open the recently-used applications window. Note: This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task manager. menu. 2. A pop-up displays the six most recently used applications. 3. Tap an icon to open the recent application. Context Menu Understanding Your Phone 45 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Customizing the Screens You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media, while another screen might contain communication apps such as Gmail. You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens
Assigning a New Home screen
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
Sharing Application Information
Managing Shortcuts
Adding and Removing Widgets
Changing the Background (Wallpapers) 46 Adding and Deleting Screens Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these screens and then add them back later. Note: These screens can be deleted and re-arranged. Important! Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least one screen. To delete a screen:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Edit page. 2. Touch and hold, then drag the undesired screen up to the Remove tab (
). 3. Press to return to the main Home screen. To add a screen:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Edit page. 2. Tap
(Add screen). The newly added screen appears as the last page. 3. Press to return to the main Home screen. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Rearranging the Screens 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Edit page. 2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new location. Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right is screen last screen. Assigning a New Home Screen 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Edit page. 2. Tap
. The new Home screen then indicates this
(Home screen) icon at the top of the selected screen. Sharing an App The devices Applications menu now comes with a feature that allows you to share information about your selected applications with external users. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Place a check mark alongside those applications you and then tap Share apps. Apps. Note: Shared applications consist of those that have previously been downloaded from the Play Store. 4. Select a sharing method. Choose from: Add to Dropbox, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google, Google+, Hangouts, Memo, Messages, and Wi-Fi Direct. 5. The recipient is notified about the receipt of the new information. Managing Shortcuts Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can begin to move it to the adjacent screen.If this does not work, delete it from its current screen. Activate the new screen and then add the selected shortcut. wish to share information about and tap Done. Understanding Your Phone 47 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:
1. From the Home screen, select a screen location for your new shortcut by scrolling across your available screens until you reach the desired one. 2. Tap Apps (
) to reveal all your current available applications. By default, applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid. 4. Scroll across the pages and touch and hold an application to place a copy on the current screen. To delete a shortcut:
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from its location on the current screen. 2. Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab (
) and 3. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired release it. application. 4. Touch and hold the on-screen icon. The new shortcut then appears to hover over the current screen. 5. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the current screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock the shortcut into its new position. To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:
1. From the Home screen, navigate to a screen with an empty area. 2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen. 3. From the Home screen window, tap Apps and widgets Apps. 48 Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts Note: You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the exception of the Apps shortcut. To remove a primary shortcut:
From the Home screen, touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to replace, then drag it to an empty space on any available screen. The primary shortcuts are now updated to show an empty slot. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To insert a new primary shortcut:
Apps. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Locate your desired application, then touch and hold the on-screen icon to position it on a desired screen. For more information, refer to Managing Shortcuts on page 47 3. Locate the screen with the desired shortcut you want to add as the new primary shortcut. Adding and Removing Widgets Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on any screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets display as applications. To add a Widget:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Scroll across the Widget pages and locate a desired Apps Widgets tab. Widget. 4. Touch and hold the shortcut until it detaches from the 3. Touch and hold an available Widget until it detaches screen. 5. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it into the empty space within the row of primary shortcuts. The new primary shortcut will now display on both the Home and Extended screens. from the screen. 4. While still holding the Widget, scroll left or right across the available screens and let go of the Widget to place it on your current screen. Understanding Your Phone 49 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To remove a Widget:
1. Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current screen. 2. Drag the widget over the Remove tab (
) and release it.
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn red.
This action doesnt delete the Widget, it just removes it from the current screen. To place a widget onto a different screen:
1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent. 2. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page. 3. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen. 4. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens. 50 Managing Wallpapers Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery
(default phone wallpapers). Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery power. To change the current Home screen wallpaper:
1. Navigate to any screen. or Press to go to the Home screen. 2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen. 3. From the Home screen window tap Set wallpaper Home screen. 4. Select a Wallpaper type:
Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery, crop the image, and tap Done.
Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds, once done tap Set wallpaper.
Tap Wallpapers, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper image, then tap Set wallpaper. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Note: Wallpapers supports the following image types: JPEG, PNG, GIF, BMP, and WBMP. To change Wallpapers from Settings Menu:
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Display Wallpaper. or Touch and hold an empty area of the screen and select Set wallpaper. 2. Choose from Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screen. Note: The Home and lock screens is an additional option that allows you to change both screens at the same time. 3. Select a wallpaper type (Gallery, Live wallpaper, or Wallpapers). 4. Choose an image and tap Done or Set wallpaper. To change the current Lock screen wallpaper:
1. Navigate to any screen, touch and hold an empty area of the screen, and tap Set wallpaper Lock screen. or From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Display Wallpaper Lock screen. 2. Select a Wallpaper type:
Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery, crop the image, and tap Done.
Tap Travel wallpaper to display recommended destination images on your lock screen. Select a slideshow interval.
Tap Wallpaper, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper image, then tap Set wallpaper. Understanding Your Phone 51 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 3: Call Functions and Contacts List This section describes features and functionality associated with making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to store contact information. Displaying Your Phone Number Making a Call You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM card or to the devices memory. These entries are referred to as the Contacts list. From the Home screen, press More tab Settings Status. Your phone number displays in the My phone number field. and then tap About device Note: The devices Settings menu can also be activated Menu and then tapping Settings. by pressing 52 Note: If your screen goes black during your interaction with the device (launching Keypad, etc.), you might be accidentally swiping over the front sensors. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Enter the phone number and then tap Phone. If you make a mistake while dialing, tap clear the last digit. Touch and hold entire sequence. to to clear the Note: When you activate the Auto retry option in the Other call settings menu, the device Call settings automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not answer the call or is already on the phone, provided your call is not sent to voicemail. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Locate a contact from the list. 3. Touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the right. This action places a call to the recipient.
(Contacts). Running a Call in the Background If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen, you are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green phone icon displayed in the Status bar. This is the best way to stay on your current call and do something else (multi-task) such as access the Contacts list, view a recent email, locate a picture, etc. In Call Notification Ending a Call Briefly tap the key to end the call. Note: To redial a recent number, tap at the end of the call Call or locate the number from the Logs list, tap the entry and tap Call. Ending a Call from the Status Bar 1. From an active call, you can launch a separate application or return to the Home screen. The current call is kept active in the background. 2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel. 3. Tap End to end the currently active call. Call Functions and Contacts List 53 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Making Emergency Calls If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card. Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available. Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed 1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make an emergency call. 2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap
. Complete your call. Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal calling operations, you should first exit this mode. 1. Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device. 2. From the Home screen, tap 3. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap
. 4. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call features. During this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call features. Note: This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly than a normal calling mode. Note: Selecting Location consent may drain battery power. For 5. At the Emergency Callback screen, follow the more information, refer to Power Saving Mode on page 272 on-screen instructions. 3. Tap to exit this calling mode. 54 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Add 2-sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a 2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed. Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple 2 second pauses.
Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the phone waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be manually sent by tapping Yes.
Call settings to provide you access to the Call settings screen. Dialing Options When you enter numbers on the Keypad, you will see three on-screen options. From the keypad screen, use one of the following options:
Voicemail (
) to access your Voicemail service.
Call (
Delete (
) to call the entered number.
) to delete digits from the current number. To view additional dialing options:
After entering a number, tap
:
Send message to send the current caller a text message while still maintaining the current call active.
Add to contacts to add the current number to either a new or existing Contacts entry.
Speed dial setting to access the Speed dialing setting menu where you can assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry. Call Functions and Contacts List 55 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Answering a Call When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the incoming call image. The caller's phone number, picture, or name if stored in Contacts List, displays. Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer. If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the entrys name displays. You may also see the callers phone number, if available. Managing Reject Calls This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown callers as rejected contacts. These Contacts are then added to your Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries from within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Tap the Auto reject mode field to configure your and then tap Call settings
. Call rejection. automatic rejection settings. Rejected calls are routed automatically to your voicemail. Choose from:
Off: disables the auto rejection feature.
All numbers: enables the features for all known and unknown numbers, including those contacts that are not assigned to the rejection list.
Auto reject numbers: automatically rejects all entries assigned to the Reject list/Blacklist. Touch and drag upward to reject with a message Touch and slide in any direction to reject the call Touch and slide in any direction to answer the call 56 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Adding numbers to the rejection list Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or via the Auto reject list menu. The Contacts menu option assigns all numbers for an individual as rejected. The Auto reject list allows to assign individual numbers. To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts:
(Contacts). 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Locate an entry and tap it to open the Contact Overview Screen (page 96). 3. Press and then tap Add to reject list. All phone numbers associated with this entry are then added to the reject list. To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list:
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call rejection Auto reject list. 2. Tap
(Create) and either enter the phone number or select a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list. 3. Tap Save to complete the assignment. International Calls 1. From the Home screen, tap and then touch and hold
until the device shows + on-screen. 2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, 3. area code, and phone number. If you make a mistake, tap single digit. or Touch and hold to delete all digits. once to delete a 4. Tap
. Call Functions and Contacts List 57 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Pause Dialing You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone numbers.
2-Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after a two-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a comma (,). 1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen keypad to enter the phone number. 2. Press and then tap Add 2-sec pause. This feature adds an automatic two-second pause. 3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that are dialed automatically after the second pause. Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering multiple 2 second pauses. 4. Tap
. 58 Wait Dialing Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next sequence of numbers.
Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Yes. This is indicated in the number string as a semicolon (;). Note: Do not add multiple Waits (;) to a number string as this will continue to prompt you after each sequence. 1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen keypad to enter the phone number. 2. Press and then tap Add wait. This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits. 3. Tap 4. Once prompted to Send the following tones?, tap Yes to
. dial the remaining digits. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Redialing the Last Number The device stores the numbers of the calls youve dialed, received, or missed if the caller is identified. To recall any of these numbers:
Setting Up Speed Dial Entries Important! Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other number can be assigned to this slot. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap the
.
(Logs tab) to display the list of recent calls. 3. Tap the name/number and tap
. Speed Dialing Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List, you can set up to 99 speed dial entries (2-100) and then dial them easily whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric key. Note: Speed dial location #1 must be reserved for Voicemail use. 1. From the Home screen, tap
(Keypad tab). 2. Press and then tap Speed dial setting. The Speed dial setting screen displays a virtual list of locations with the numbers 2 through 100. 3. Tap an unassigned number slot. The Select contact screen displays. 4. Tap a contact and select a number to assign it to the speed dial location. The selected contact number/
image displays in the speed dial number box. Call Functions and Contacts List 59 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order Removing a Speed Dial Entry 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press and then tap Speed dial setting. Keypad tab. Important! The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number cannot be assigned to this slot. 3. Press 4. Tap the current entry then tap the new target speed and then tap Change order. dial location. Note: Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the entries to switch positions. 5. Tap Done. to store the change. 6. Press to return to the previous screen. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Touch and hold a existing on-screen speed dial and then tap Speed dial setting. Keypad tab. location and select Remove from the context menu. or Press select
(to complete the deletion) or Cancel (to exit). and then tap Remove. Tap an entry and
(Remove entry). Select either Done 4. Press to return to the previous screen. Making a Call Using Speed Dial You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the Contacts List for speed dialing. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Touch and hold a previously created speed dial location
(numbers 2-100, or 1 if you are dialing voice mail) until the number begins to dial. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, tap Speed dial setting and tap a speed 3. 60 dial number to view the assigned phone number. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential In Call Options Your device provides a number of features that are available for use during a call. Adjusting the Call Volume During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the device, to adjust the earpiece volume. Personalized call sound Dialer Noise Reduction Adds a new call Activates or Deactivates speakerphone Mutes or Unmutes the call Call duration Places a call on hold Extra volume Ends the call Activates or Deactivates Bluetooth Headset During a call, press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and the Down volume key to decrease the level. or Adjust the audio by enabling selecting an audio preset. Tap the on-screen Personalize call sound button select an equalizer setting for the incoming call.
Enabled/disabled via the Call settings menu (Call settings Personalize call sound). For more information, refer to Configuring General Call Settings on page 292 or Quickly add more volume to the incoming audio by tapping the on-screen Extra volume button Note: Noise reduction and Extra volume features are disabled while using Wi-Fi Calling. From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using these keys. Call Functions and Contacts List 61 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Adjusting Noise Reduction During a call it may be necessary to adjust the noise reduction feature. Activating this feature can improve the quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise. 1. Tap
(Noise reduction off) to toggle the status and activate the feature. 2. Tap
(Noise reduction on) to toggle the status and deactivate the feature. Personalizing the Call Sound Setting During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the incoming call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the current call. 1. Tap 2. Confirm the option is enabled
(Personalize call sound). Note: If prompted to enable the feature via the Call settings menu, go to Call settings Personalize call sound. 3. Select an available option. Choose from: Adapt Sound, Soft sound, Clear sound, and Off. 62 Placing a Call on Hold You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your network supports this service, you can also make another call while a call is in progress. To place a call on hold:
1. Tap Hold to place the current call on hold. 2. Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold. To make a new call while a call is in progress:
1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up in Call history. 2. Once connected, tap Add call to dial the second call. 3. Dial the new phone number and tap
. To switch between the two calls:
Tap Swap. The previous In call number turns gray and displays On hold. The new active call displays a green background behind the number. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Turning the Speakerphone on and off While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following these steps:
1. Tap Speaker
(Speaker off) to toggle the speakerphone on. 2. Tap Speaker
(Speaker on) to toggle the speakerphone off. Tip: When the speaker is turned On, the color of the speaker is green. When the speaker is turned Off, the color of the speaker is white. Muting a Call 1. Tap
(Mute off) to turn mute on so the other caller Mute cannot hear you speaking. 2. Tap
(Mute on) to turn mute off and resume your Mute conversation. Switching to Bluetooth Headset 1. Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call. 2. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of speaker by tapping Headset
(Headset off). 3. At the prompt, tap OK to enable Bluetooth if it is not already activated. 4. While on a call, switch back to the device speaker by tapping
(Headset on). Headset More In-call Options During a call you can save the current callers information to the Contacts list, or create a Memo. Viewing the Contacts List During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list. and then tap Contacts. 1. Press 2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need. 3. Press to return to the active call. Call Functions and Contacts List 63 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Creating a Memo During a Call During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note). 1. Press 2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save. and then tap Memo. Creating a Message During a Call During a call you can create a message. and then tap Message 1. Press 2. Address and create the message. 3. Review your message and tap
(Compose).
(Send). Multi-Party calls Making a Multi-Party Call A multi-party call is a network service that multiple people to participate in a multi-party or conference call. For further details about subscribing to this service, contact Customer service. Setting up a Multi-Party Call 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap
. 3. Once connected, tap Add call, enter the second phone
. The first caller is placed on number and tap hold. 4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and tap Merge. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party call and display in the order in which they were called. 64 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Note: The option is not available for multi-party calls created while using the Wi-Fi Calling feature. You must be on the cellular network to use the manage feature. 3. Tap the participant to which you want to speak privately. You can now talk privately to that person while the other participants can continue to converse with each other. If there is only one other participant, that person is placed on hold. 4. To return to the multi-party call, tap the Merge icon. All of the multi-party call participants can now hear each other. Important! Multiple callers can be joined to a single multi-party line. Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session and are held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call. You can swap or place each multi-party call on hold. Having a Private Conversation With One Participant Note: The Manage conference call option is not available for multi-party calls created while using the Wi-Fi Calling feature. You must be on the cellular network to use the manage feature. When you have two participants in a multi-party session, it might be necessary to place one of those participants on hold so that a private conversation can be held with a single caller. While you are in a multi-party call:
1. Press 2. Tap and then tap Manage conference call.
(Split Caller) adjacent to the participants you would like to split from the current multi-line call. The list displays the callers in the order they were dialed. Call Functions and Contacts List 65 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Dropping One Participant 1. Press and then tap Manage conference call to the right of the number to drop. End The participant is disconnected and you can continue the call with the other participant. 2. Tap to end your conversation with the remaining caller. Call Waiting You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress, if this service is supported by the network and you have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. For more information, refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 265 To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:
1. In a single motion, touch direction to answer the new incoming call. and slide it in any 2. Tap an option from the Accept call after menu:
Putting xxx on hold to place the previous caller on hold while you answer the new incoming call.
Ending call with xxx to end the previous call and answer the new call. Note: The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller is placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list. 3. Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places the new caller on hold and activates the previous call. Important! The currently active call displays with a green background. 4. Tap Swap again to switch back. 66 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using S Voice This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide variety of functions on your device. This is a natural language recognition application. This goes beyond the Google Search Voice Actions feature that simply recognizes Google commands and search terms. You can ask it questions (Is it raining in Dallas?) or give it commands (Show me where to find cheap gas). Apps 1. From the Home screen, tap
(S Voice). 2. Read the on-screen disclaimer information and tap Confirm to continue. 3. Review the Terms of Service and tap Agree to continue. 4. Navigate through the following on-screen tutorial screens by reading the information and tapping Next, or tap Skip to continue without reading the information. 5. Wake up the application by repeating the phrase Hi Galaxy. Note: The wake-up command/phrase can be changed from Hi Galaxy to anything else. 6. Tap
(Speak) if the device does not hear you or to give it a command. Example 1:
I want to find the best pizza online.
Tap and say Find me the best Pizza. This launches an Internet search. Example 2:
I want to go to Cambridge.
Tap and say Navigate to Cambridge. This launches the Map application and indicates where this is in relation to your current position. Call Functions and Contacts List 67 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Logs Tab The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts entries) for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Logs tab makes redialing a number fast and easy. It is continually updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list. The Notification area of the Home screen (upper left) displays phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:
Displays when a call is in progress. Displays when a call was missed. Accessing the Logs Tab 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap an entry to view available options.
(Logs tab). Note: The Logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is turned on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be included in your calling history. Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts). Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device. Indicates any received calls that were answered. Indicates a missed call. Indicates any received calls that were rejected. Indicates auto rejected calls. 68 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Accessing Call log from The Notifications Area from the Notifications area of the Status 1. Locate
Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration.
View more to view additional log information from the current bar. 2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel. 3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen. This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on how they are touched. Call logs - Caller Overview
Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options screen:
entry.
Copy to dialing screen press to pass the current number to your dialer and then edit the selected number before you place your next outbound call.
Delete press
Send number press to delete the Contacts entry. to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient.
Add to reject list press to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller are blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.
Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your
Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context Contacts. menu:
View contact to view the Contact details for the current entry.
Update existing to update an existing Contacts entry with the current number.
Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number.
Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected entry.
Copy to dialing screen to make alterations to the current phone number prior to redial.
Add to contacts to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts.
Send number to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient. Call Functions and Contacts List 69 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential View contact to view the information for the currently stored Contacts entry.
Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller is blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.
Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list. Altering Numbers from the Logs List If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you need to alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the appropriate prefix by prepending the number. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific Logs tab. context menu. 3. Tap Copy to dialing screen. 4. Edit the number using the on-screen keypad or delete Erasing the Call logs List You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries from the Logs list. To clear a single entry from the list:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Touch and hold an entry and select Delete Delete. Logs tab. To clear all entries from the list:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Tap Select all. 4. Tap Delete Delete to continue with the erasure. and then tap Delete. Logs tab. or Tap Cancel to stop the current process. digits by pressing to erase the numbers. once the number has been changed. 5. Tap 70 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Call Duration 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:
and then tap Call duration. Logs tab.
Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.
Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.
Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls received.
All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and received. You may reset these times to zero by pressing then tapping Reset. Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen When you are unable to answer a call for any reason and your screen is locked, the number of missed calls are displayed on the Lock screen immediately after a call is missed. 1. Press 2. Touch and drag the button (with the number of missed
(Power/End) to reactivate the screen. calls on it) anywhere on the screen. The Logs tab is then displayed. Call Functions and Contacts List 71 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 4: Entering Text This section describes how to select the desired text input method when entering characters into your device. This section also describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering text. Your device comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text. Your device also provides several on-screen keypad text entry options to make the task of text entry that much easier. Text Input Methods There are three text input methods available:
Google voice typing: provides a voice to text interface.
Samsung keyboard (default): an on-screen QWERTY keyboard that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation.
Swype: is enabled so as you can enter text as you swipe across the on-screen keyboard. Instead of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each letter of a word. 72 The on-screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and landscape mode. Selecting the Text Input Method The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two locations:
Settings Menu:
From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings input Default and select an input method. My device tab Language and My device My device Text Input field:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen. 2. Tap
(Select input method) and select an available input method. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Entering Text Using Swype Swype is the default text input method that allows you to enter a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the next word. Swype also includes a touch predictive text system. The on-screen keyboard options are different between the Android keyboard and Swype on-screen input methods. Note: During its initial use, you may be prompted by a series of Swype Connect set up screens. Follow the initial on-screen set up instructions. Enabling and Configuring Swype If you configure another text input method (Samsung keyboard) you must re-enable Swype before using the Swype keyboard. For more detailed information on configuring Swype settings, see Swype Settings on page 278. When Swype is enabled there can also be normal keyboard functionality. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Language and input. 2. Tap Default Swype. Swype Text Entry Tips You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following Swype text entry tips.
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such as pp in apple).
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a selection.
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions.
Double-touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled word, then touch the delete key to erase one character. Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word. Entering Text 73 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype 1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. 2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one of the following text mode options:
ABC Edit ABC to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from the on-screen keyboard.
SYM (Symbol) 123
+!=
on-screen keyboard. to enter numbers and symbols from the Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the key and all letters that follow are in lower changes to case. 74 Swype Keyboard Overview
Recipients: a field where you can enter the recipients of the current message. You can choose from Groups, Favorites, Contacts, or Logs.
Text Input field: a field where text, number, or other characters can be entered.
CAPS/ALT key: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in SYM mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.
SWYPE settings: Touch and hold this button to access the Swype settings screen.
Text Input mode: There are two available modes: 123ABC and SYM. 123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates SYM. SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode button indicates 123ABC. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Recipients Text input field Suggestions CAPS/ALT key SWYPE Settings Text Input mode Current Mode Delete Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE In 123ABC mode, you can enter only letters and a few common punctuation marks from the on-screen keyboard. The text mode key shows
. 123
+!=
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. 2. Tap Edit ABC to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode
(showing letters and numbers on the on-screen keys). Once in this mode, the text input type shows
. 123
+!=
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the key and all letters that follow are in lower changes to case. 3. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a word. If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character. Touch and hold to erase an entire word.
(Send) to deliver the message. 4. Tap Entering Text 75 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE By using the on-screen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols are not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys). In SYM mode using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers from the on-screen keyboard. Once in SYM mode, the text mode key shows
. Edit ABC 1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. 2. Tap 123
+!=
to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once in this mode, the text input type shows Edit ABC 3. Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want to enter. to select from additional symbols. 2 4. Tap 1 For example:
To enter : tap 123
+!=
2 1 and select the key. All lowercase Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase. Pressing this while in 123SYM mode, reveals additional numeric-symbols keys. Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase. All Uppercase Displays when all characters are entered as uppercase characters. By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the following letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you lift your finger, the cursor automatically adds a space after the word. Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an on-screen popup appears to provide additional word choices. 76 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using the Samsung Keyboard This QWERTY keyboard can be used to enter text in either a Portrait or landscape orientation. The only difference between the two orientations are the sizes of the keys. From a screen where you enter text, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation. The on-screen QWERTY keyboard displays. The Samsung Keyboard This device has a built-in, QWERTY keypad (portrait mode) or keyboard (landscape mode). Using the QWERTY keypad/
keyboard, you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other characters. To use the Samsung keyboard you must first configure the settings to default to the Samsung keyboard. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap My device My device My device tab Language and Settings input Default Samsung keyboard. or From a screen where you can enter text, touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen,
(Select input method) Samsung then select keyboard. 2. The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung keyboard configuration for all subsequent text input. Shift key Text input field Send Input Mode Indicator Current Mode Delete Input Options
/Settings For more detailed information on configuring Samsung Keyboard settings, see Samsung Keyboard Settings on page 276. Entering Text 77 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Entering Text using Different Input Options Although the default text input method with the Samsung keyboard is to use the on-screen keys you have other options. Changing the Text Input Mode in Keyboard 1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. 2. With Samsung keyboard as your text entry method, select one of the following text mode options:
Abc
: to use alphabetic characters from the on-screen
. keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays ABCABC
Symbol/Numeric
: to enter numbers by pressing the numbers selecting them on the on-screen keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays There are up to 2 available pages of numeric symbols available by tapping ABCABC 1/21/2
. Note: To access settings, touch and hold the Input Methods button
, then tap the available options.
(Settings) then select it from 1. From within an active message, tap the text input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. 2. Tap
(Input Methods) to use the default Voice typing input method to convert your spoken words to on-screen text. or Touch and hold methods such as:
Voice to launch Google Voice.
Clipboard to launch the devices clipboard area from where to select from other input you can select a current clipboard item to place in your current message.
Settings to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu. 78 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, tap to toggle capitalization. All lowercase Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase. Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase. All Uppercase Displays when all characters are entered as uppercase characters. By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the cursor automatically advances to the next space. Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keyboard 1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. 2. Tap ABCABC to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once in this mode, the text input type displays
. Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the key and all letters that follow are in lower changes to case. 3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard. If you make a mistake, tap to erase a single character. Touch and hold to erase an entire word. Send to deliver the message. 4. Tap Entering Text 79 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using Symbol/Numeric Mode Use the Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or emoticons. While in this mode, the text mode key displays ABCABC
. 1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Rotate the phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired. 2. Tap to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode. Once in this mode, the text input type shows ABCABC
. 3. Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character. 4. Tap to return to ABC mode. ABCABC To enter symbols:
1. Tap mode. to configure the keyboard for Symbol 2. Tap the appropriate symbol key. or Tap button to cycle through additional pages.
The first number on this key indicates which page (1 or 2) of 1/21/2 additional characters is active. 80 Using the Google Voice Typing This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your spoken words into on-screen text. You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing feature. 1. From the keyboard, touch the top of the screen and drag it down to display your notification panel. 2. Tap 3. At the Listening prompt
(Select input method) Google voice typing.
(Speak now), speak clearly and distinctly into the microphone. The text displays in the message as you are speaking. For more detailed information on configuring Google Voice Typing settings, see Configure Google Voice Typing on page 275. 4. Tap
(Done) when you are finished. or Tap
(Resume) to resume recognition. Note: The feature works best when you break your message down into smaller segments. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using Google Voice Typing 1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the
(Select input bottom of the screen, then select method) Google voice typing. The virtual keyboard is then removed and all subsequent input to done using the microphone as text to speech. 2. Speak into the devices microphone and watch your text as it is entered on-screen. 3. Tap DELETE if the text is incorrect. Entering Text 81 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 5: Accounts and Contacts This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List. You can save phone numbers to your phones memory. Accounts From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After determining how you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts list. 1. Sign in to your Google account. 2. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings the My accounts area. Accounts tab and then navigate to Note: The Accounts area lists those accounts that were added to the device and provides an Add account button to quickly and easily add new ones. Contacts List Creating a Contact The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your devices built-in memory. If existing Google and Corporate email accounts were synchronized to your phone, these accounts are available to your device during the creation of new entries. These new Contacts entries can be assigned or saved to synced accounts such as Phone, SIM, Google, or Corporate. Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically. You can create either a Device, SIM, Samsung account, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync contact. Important! The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account types are only visible after creating an email account of those types on your phone.
Device contacts are stored locally on the device. 82 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default Note: When storing an entry onto your micro SIM card, note parameters, contacts stored on the phone can be lost.
SIM contacts are stored onto the micro SIM Card. Note: SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry.
Samsung account contacts are shared with your existing Samsung account.
Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail account.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (also known as Work or Outlook) contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook.
Add new account lets you create a new account type. Choose from Samsung account, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. that only the Name, and Number are saved. To save additional information for a particular contact, such as notes, email, dates, etc., it is important to save that Contact into your phones onboard memory. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap to create a contact.
(Contacts). Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad and pressing Add to Contacts Create contact. Continue with step 3. and then tap 3. Tap a destination type (Device, SIM, Samsung account, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync) (depending on where you want to save the new contact information). Accounts and Contacts 83 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad.
Tap to access additional name entries such as: Name prefix, First name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix. 5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact. Selections are: Image, Pictures by people, or Take picture. Note: The label entries below can change and are dependant on the selected destination type (ex: the Other and Custom might not display with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type). 6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone field) and scroll through the list to select a category such as Mobile, Work, Home, Main, Work Fax, Home Fax, Pager, Other, or Custom. 7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number. on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously
Tap entered phone number.
Tap
Tap to enter an additional phone number to remove a previously entered phone number. 84 8. Enter additional information such as: Groups, Ringtone, Message alert, Vibration pattern or tap Add another field to input additional category information.
Add another field contains the following options: Phonetic name, Organization, Email, IM, Address, Notes, Nickname, Website, Events, or Relationship. 9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry. or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry. To save a Number from your Keypad:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad. 3. Tap Add to Contacts Create contact or select the
(Phone). Contact entry from the on-screen list. or Press contact or select the Contact entry from the on-screen list. and then tap Add to Contacts Create If you are updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and proceed to step 5. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. Tap a destination type (Device, SIM, Samsung account, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync) (depending on where you want to save the new contact information). 5. Tap the Name and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad.
Tap to access additional name entries such as: Name prefix, First name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix. 6. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact. Selections are: Image, Pictures by people, or Take picture. Note: The label entries below can change and are dependant on the selected destination type (ex: the Other and Custom might not display with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type). 7. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone field) and scroll through the list to select a category such as Mobile, Work, Home, Main, Work Fax, Home Fax, Pager, Other, or Custom. 8. Enter additional fields as desired. 9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry. or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry. Note: For further details about how to enter characters, see Text Input Methods on page 77. Accounts and Contacts 85 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Create Contacts Tabbed Navigation Tabs Search Contacts field Contacts Finding a Contact You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto either your SIM card, your phones built-in memory, or an external location (such as Google, or Exchange). They are all physically separate but are used as a single entity, called Contacts. Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may differ.
(Contacts). 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Swipe up or down until the contact displays. or Tap the Search field and begin entering the entrys name. Matching entries are then displayed. This process filters through all of your current account Contact entries to only show you the matching entries. or Touch and hold the letter tab area (on the right) until on-screen letters display, then scroll through the list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts list. Touch the contact entry. 86 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Editing Contact Information 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap a contact name from the list and tap
.
(Edit). Adding a Number to an Existing Contact 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Touch and hold an entry and select Edit to reveal the
. or Select a contact name and press Edit. and then tap or Touch and hold a Contacts entry from the main Contacts list and then tap Edit. 3. Edit the contact information then:
Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or
Tap Cancel to delete the current entry. Contact entrys details screen. 3. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number. on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously
Tap entered phone number.
Tap
Tap to enter an additional phone number to remove a previously entered phone number. 4. Enter additional information such as: Groups, Ringtone, Message alert, Vibration pattern or tap Add another field to input additional category information.
Add another field contains the following options: Phonetic name, Organization, Phone, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website, Events, or Relationship. 5. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry. or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry. Accounts and Contacts 87 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Adding a Pause or Wait to an Existing Contact Deleting Contacts Important! Once Contacts list entries are deleted, they cannot be recovered. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select
. Delete OK. 1. From the Home screen, tap and use the on-screen keypad to enter a new phone number. 2. Press and then tap Add 2-sec pause. This feature adds an automatic two-second pause. or and then tap Add wait. This feature causes Press the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits. 3. Tap Add to Contacts 4. Scroll through the available list of existing entries and Update existing. select the desired target. Note: This new phone number is then added as a new number to the selected entry. 5. Tap the label button (to the left of the new phone number) and scroll through the list to select a category type. 6. Tap Save to store and update the entry. 88 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Contact List Options 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press
. The following options display:
Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the USB storage location, SIM card or SD card.
Share namecard via: allows you can to send namecards via methods such as Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messages, or Wi-Fi Direct.
Merge accounts: allows you to merge all of your current Contact entries with either your active Google or Samsung account. If several of your contacts are from other external sources, this allows you to back them up or copy them to your Samsung account. Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit.
Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing.
Send message/email: allows you to send a text /picture message or an email using your Google account.
Contacts to display: allows you to choose to display All contacts, those on your Device, SIM card, Samsung account, Gmail, or only display contacts that are part of a Customized list.
Settings: allows you to configure where you save new contacts to, or view your service numbers, or send contact information. Options include: Only contacts with phones, List by, Display contacts by, Service numbers, Contact sharing settings, and Accounts.
Help: provides an on-screen Help file that covers most high level topics for Contacts. Accounts and Contacts 89 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Contact Menu Options 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu. The following options display:
Edit: allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry.
Delete: allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry.
Link contact: allows you to link the current contact to another current contact. Similar to a see also feature. If you cant remember a contacts information, linking entries can help you find the person you are looking for.
Share contact via message: allows you to send the current entry info via text message.
Add to reject list/ Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove the current Contacts entry to a list of automatically rejected incoming phone numbers. Note: If an entry does not have a phone number, the reject list option will not display.
Share namecard via: allows you to send the current Contact entrys information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth, Dropbox (if enabled), Email (Exchange or Internet), Gmail, Messages, or Wi-Fi Direct.
Print contact info: allows you to print selected information on a compatible Samsung printer.
Add shortcut to home: adds a shortcut to the current Contacts
Add to favorites: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry entry to an available screen location. to the list within the Favorites tab.
Remove from favorites: allows you to remove the current Contacts entry from the Favorites tab.
Add to group: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an existing group. 90 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Contact Entry Options 1. From the Home screen, tap
. 2. Tap an entry to reveal the Contact entrys Overview Screen. This screen contains Name, contact numbers, email, and linked contact information. 3. Press entry. to reveal the context menu specific to this 4. Tap an available option. Linking Contact Information Most people maintain multiple email accounts, social networking logins, and other similar account information. For example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a corporate email account login because they are maintained separately and for different groups of people. This device can synchronize with multiple accounts. When you synchronize your phone with those accounts, each account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list. If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account under her maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat account, when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list you can link all of her entries and view the information in one record. Linking contact information makes sending messages easy. You can select any account email address or information all from one screen, versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate the desired account information. Accounts and Contacts 91 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 5. Tap the main linked contact to view the contact information you linked. The contacts and information displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type of account information is contained in the entry. Next time you synchronize your device with your accounts, any updates contacts make to email account names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to
. another entry) to reveal the Contact entrys Overview Screen. Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information. and then tap Link contact. 3. Press 4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link). The second contact is now linked with the first and the account information is merged into one screen. The first contact image displays for both entries, and the first contacts name is used. For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie
(second entry). Julie seems to disappear and only Amy remains. Tap the Amy entry (showing the Amy image) to view both. 92 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Unlinking a Contact 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
. want to unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry. Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information. 3. Tap the Connection area. or Press and then tap Separate contact. 4. Tap next to the entry you want to unlink and select OK. The contacts are unlinked or separated and no longer display in the merged record screen. Both contacts display separately. Marking a Contact as Default When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other messaging type applications, the application needs to know which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For example, when you say Call John Smith, if you have three phone records for John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the default number or entry. The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple entries for the same person. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap a Contact entry. 3. Press
. and then tap Mark as default. The Mark as default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name, phone number, or other contact information. 4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want to be the primary information (such as name, phone number, or email) and select Done. Accounts and Contacts 93 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Note: If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry, assigning a number as the default means that the default number is automatically dield when you initiate a call. Sending a Namecard A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap a Contact entry. 3. Press
. and then tap Share namecard via and select a delivery method: Bluetooth, Dropbox (if enabled), ChatON, Email (Exchange or Internet), Gmail, Messages, or Wi-Fi Direct. The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is delivered when you send the message. Note: Email displays as an option only after an Internet or Exchange email account was gt6mjgtmjnnnnk created. 94 Sending All Current Namecards Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send all of your current entries at once. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press and then tap Import/Export
. Share namecard via. 3. Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently displayed Contact entries. 4. Tap Done and select a delivery method:
Bluetooth to transmit the contacts to another Bluetooth-
compatible device.
ChatON
Email to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing email
(Exchange or Internet). Note: The Web storage Upload feature requires that you be logged into your Samsung account prior to upload.
Gmail to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Internet-
based email.
Messages to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text message. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Wi-Fi Direct to transmit the entries to another Wi-Fi Direct enabled device. Sending a namecard using Bluetooth You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a recipient. For more information, refer to Creating a Contact on page 82 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen
. context menu. Copying Contact Information Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts list is your devices built-in memory. This procedure allows you to copy numbers saved to the phones memory, onto the SIM card. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. From the Contacts List, press
. and then tap Import/Export Export to SIM card. 3. Tap Share namecard via Bluetooth. 3. Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact Important! You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature. 4. Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card. Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient. entries. or Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark indicates a selection. 4. Tap Done. The name and phone number for the selected contact is then copied to the SIM. Accounts and Contacts 95 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the phones memory, onto the SIM card. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. From the Contacts List, press
. Import/Export Export to SD card. and then tap 3. Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries. 96 Synchronizing Contacts Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact entries, and be signed into your account via the phone. With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your device. Note: You must log into your Gmail and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts using this device in order to synchronize contacts. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Accounts tab and then select the email account containing the contacts to synchronize. 2. Tap next to the account field to reveal the accounts synchronization settings screen.
If displays next to the account field, this indicates a synchronization error. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 3. Toggle the active state of the Sync Contacts field to synchronize only Contacts. A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled. Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes. If after 10-20 minutes, your list was not updated, repeat steps 2-3. Your Contacts tab reflects any updated Contact information. Display Options The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose which contacts to display. You can also choose to display only contacts that have phone numbers. Note: Once a display filter is selected, only those Contact entries display until the All contacts option is re-selected. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press
. and then tap Contacts to display. Select any of the following to filter according to the selection:
All contacts allows you to display all available Contacts.
Device lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone.
SIM lists those Contacts currently found only on your SIM card.
Samsung account lists those Contacts currently found and syncd within the Samsung account.
Google lists those Contacts currently found within the Google account.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync lists those Contacts currently found within the Exchange account. Accounts and Contacts 97 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Customized list allows you to enable which account categories are displayed. For example, on Google contacts, you can filter which Contact categories display (Friends, Family, etc..) Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the Accounts and sync option synchronizes the data from the selected account type with your Contacts list. and then tap 1. From the Home screen, press Settings and then tap Add account. Accounts tab, touch an account, 2. Determine which type of account information you want to synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:
Samsung account, Dropbox, Email, Google, LDAP, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, or Sync apps with Facebook. 3. Tap an account type to add. 4. Follow the prompts. The selected account type synchronizes with your Contacts list. 98 5. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact information. For more information, refer to Linking Contact Information on page 91 To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:
You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list. All of their current contact information is then migrated over to your phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly different name, separate entries are created and can later be linked (joined) together into a single entry. Important! This process not only synchronizes your contact information but also your status, events, and more. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Search for and select the Facebook app. 3. When you are prompted to download the Facebook Play Store. application from the Play Store. 4. Tap INSTALL 5. Tap OPEN to launch the application. ACCEPT to complete the process. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 7. 6. Log into your Facebook account, enter your accounts access Email and Password information, and tap Log in. If prompted, configure any requested optional permissions and tap Log in. If prompted, select a Contacts Sync option. Choose from: Sync all, Sync with existing contacts, or Dont sync. 8. 9. Tap Done to complete the login and sync process. To resync Social Network Contacts:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Accounts tab and then tap Facebook and toggle the check mark beside the desired fields. 2. Choose the parameters to sync (ex: Sync Calendar, Sync Contacts, or Sync Gallery) and tap Sync now. Note: From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap Sync all to resync all accounts. Additional Contact Options Sending an Email to a Contact Note: Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can use the Send email feature. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press and then tap Send message/email Send email. Contacts that contain an email address display. 3. Tap the contact(s) to which you want to send an email. A check mark displays next to the selection. Note: The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen. 4. Tap Done. 5. Select an email account type. 6. Compose the email and tap Send. Accounts and Contacts 99 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Export/Import For more information, refer to Copying Contact Information on page 95 Contact List Settings From this menu you can determine the default storage location for Contacts, display your phones primary number, and view service numbers listed in your Contact list. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press
. and then tap Settings. Configure any of the following options:
Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those contacts containing phone numbers.
List by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted:
First name or Last name.
Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are listed: First name first (ex: Steve Smith) or Last name first
(Smith, Steve).
Contact sharing settings allows you configure how your Contacts entries are sent: individually or as a single file containing all available entries. Tap Settings to select a share setting. 100
Accounts provides quick access to your current accounts sync settings. Groups This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call group. This group can be one of the already present groups (Family, Friends, or Work) or a user-created group. Creating a New Caller Group 1. From the Home screen, tap Groups tab. 2. Press 3. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen and then tap Create. keypad to enter a new group name. For more information, refer to Text Input Methods on page 77 4. Tap Group ringtone and select a ringtone for the group. Selections are: Default ringtone, Ringtones (select from available ringtones) or Add (to navigate your device and select an existing audio file). 5. Tap Message alert and select a message alert ringtone to be associated with this group. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 6. Tap Vibration pattern and select a unique vibration pattern either from an available list or Create your own. This pattern is then associated with this group. 7. Tap Add member to add Contacts to the new group. 8. From the available list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you want to add. A check mark displays next to contact entry. Then tap Done. or Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all current entries. Then tap Done. 9. Tap Save to store the newly created group. Note: Some externally maintained group types (such as Google) can only be managed or updated remotely online vs via the device. These external types will not allow editing or deleting members locally via the phone. Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group 1. From the Home screen, tap Groups tab. 2. Tap a group entry 3. From the available list of contacts, tap the contact(s) Add group member. you want to add. A check mark displays next to contact entry. 4. Tap Done. The selected contacts are added to the group. Removing an Entry From a Caller Group 1. From the Home screen, tap Groups tab. and then tap Remove member. 2. Tap a group entry. 3. Press 4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group. A check mark displays next to contact entry. 5. Tap Done.The contacts are removed from the group. Accounts and Contacts 101 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Sending a Message to a Group 1. From the Home screen, tap Groups tab. 2. Tap an existing group, and press and then tap Send message. or Touch and hold a group entry and select Send message. 3. Select the recipients of the new message (indicated by a green check mark). If an entry contains multiple phone numbers, each must be selected individually. 4. Tap Done. 5. Type your message, and tap
(Send). Editing a Caller Group To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part of the selected group. 1. From the Home screen, tap Groups tab. 2. Touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group. 3. Make modifications to the Group name, Group ringtone, Message alert, Vibration pattern fields, or Add member. 4. Tap Save. Deleting a Caller Group 1. From the Home screen, tap Groups tab. and then tap Delete groups. 2. Press 3. Select either Select all or tap the desired group. 4. Tap Delete. 5. Select either the Group only or Group and group members. 6. Tap OK. 102 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential The Favorites Tab The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that were designated as favorite contacts. For more information, refer to Logs Tab on page 73 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap Favorites tab. Adding a contact to your favorites list:
1. From within the Favorites tab, press and select Add to favorites. 2. Place a check mark alongside the Contacts entries to assign as favorites. 3. Tap Done to complete the process. Accounts and Contacts 103 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 6: Messages This section describes how to send or receive different types of messages. It also explains the features and functionality associated with messaging. Types of Messages Your phone provides the following message types:
Text Messages
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
Email and Gmail Messages
Google Hangouts
Messenger The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service providers message service. The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service providers multimedia message service. 104 Important! During the creation of a text message, adding an image, sound file, or video clip automatically changes it from a text message (SMS) to a multimedia message (MMS). Message Icons on the Status Bar Messaging icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display when new messages are received. For more information, refer to Status Bar on page 32 Note: The Messaging application can also be accessed by and then tapping Apps pressing
(Messaging). By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Creating and Sending Messages
(Messaging) 1. From the Home screen, tap
(Compose). 2. Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a to select from one of the following:
recipient. or Tap
Groups: to select a recipient from the Group list.
Favorites: to select a recipient from the Favorites list.
Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid 4. Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter and selecting recipients. recipient field or 5. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer to Text Input Methods on page 77 6. Review your message and tap 7. If you have more than one recipient, the same text message is sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field.
(Send). Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it is entries must have a wireless phone number or email address). automatically saved as a draft.
Logs: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages. 3. If adding a recipient from either Groups, Favorites, Contacts, or Logs, tap the contact to place a check mark then tap Done. The contact displays in the recipient field. Note: Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their name/number in the recipient area and selecting Delete. Messages 105 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Locate an entry from the Contacts list. 3. Contacts. In a single motion, touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the left. This action addresses a new text message to the selected recipient. Message Options Options before composing a message Messaging. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Before composing a message, from the main Message from the main Messaging screen to screen press display additional messaging options:
Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain word or string of words. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search, then tap
. For more information, refer to Message Search on page 113 106
Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread. Select the messages to delete and a green check mark will display next to the message. Tap Delete. For more information, refer to Deleting a single message thread on page 112
Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its contents.
Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and its contents.
Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages folder and its contents.
Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its contents.
Text templates: displays your available text message reply templates. For more information, refer to Text Templates on page 118
Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more information, refer to Messaging Settings on page 113 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 3. From the Messaging screen list, touch and hold an on-screen message and select an option:
Add to Contacts: allows you to add the sender to either a new or existing Contacts entry.
View contact: allows you to view the current entry information for the sender.
Delete thread: deletes the entire message and its bubbles. Deleting a single message threadFor more information, refer to Deleting a single message bubble on page 112
Add to spam numbers: allows you to tag a number as spam so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder. Options while in a current message 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. From within an open message, press Messaging. to display additional messaging options:
Insert smiley: allows you to add insert smiley icons images (emoticons).
Add text: allows you to add text items from sources such as: Memo, Calendar, Location, Contacts, and Text templates.
Preview (only in MMS): allows you to add preview the MMS message prior to delivery.
Add to contacts: allows you to add the sender to either a new or existing Contacts entry.
View contact: reveals the current Contacts overview screen.
Add slide: converts an SMS message into an MMS
(Multimedia) message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow.
Remove slide: allows you to remove a previously attached slideshow.
Add subject: allows you to enter a subject. Messages 107 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Duration (5 secs) (only in MMS): allows you to change the
Translate: launches a Translate popup menu. Here you can duration of the image slideshow.
Layout (bottom) (only in MMS): allows you to change the layout.
Add recipients: allows you to enter additional recipients to the message.
Delete message: allows you to erase either select specific message bubbles or all current messages bubbles.
Scheduling: allows you to schedule a time for the current message to be delivered.
Add to spam numbers: allows you to tag a number as spam so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder.
Discard: closes the current open message. Note: You must be logged into your Samsung account prior to using the S Translator feature. both assign the senders original language and assign a target language for the recipient (they will receive your message in the designated language). Enable the translate feature then configure the available options as desired. Tap OK to store the new settings. Adding attachments to a message To add an attachment to your message, tap and select one of the following options:
Image: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list
(Attach) to add it to your message.
Take a picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a photo with phones camera, and then add it to your message by tapping Save.
Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list, then add it to your message.
Record video: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record a video clip using the phones camera, and then add it to your message by tapping Save. 108 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done.
Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and record an audio clip using the phones microphone. It is then automatically attached to the message.
Memo: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.
Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar.
Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your location. Adding Additional Text You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and events from your Contacts, Calendar, or a Memo. 1. While composing a message, press 2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:
Memo: allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo.
Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a Add text. calendar event to your message.
Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the location on Google Maps.
Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,
Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of then add it to your message by tapping Done. any of your contacts to your message.
Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and sentences. For more information, refer to Text Templates on page 118 The information is added to your message. Messages 109 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Viewing Newly Received Messages When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by displaying your Home screen. To read a message:
within the Notification area at the top left of 1. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For more information, refer to Notification Bar on page 38 or From the Home screen, tap message to view its contents. The selected message displays on the screen. then tap the new 2. Tap to play a multimedia message. 3.
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap In a single motion, touch and drag up or down the page to scroll through the message (if additional pages were added). Message Threads Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed in the order in which they were received, with the latest message displayed at the top. To reply to a text message:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. While the message is open, tap the Enter message field
. and then type your reply message. 3. Compose your reply. Your texts are colored Blue and your callers replies are Yellow. 4. Tap
(Send) to deliver your reply. or Press message options (page 106). and then select one of the available 110 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To access message thread options:
To access additional Bubble options:
From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the message to display the following options:
View contact: displays the Contacts Overview page.
Add to contacts: begins the process of adding the new number to your Contacts list.
Delete thread: deletes the currently selected message thread.
Add to spam numbers: adds the current sender to a spam list. ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked. Touch and hold the message bubble within an active message conversation to display the following options:
Delete message: deletes the currently selected message bubble from the thread.
Copy message text: copies the currently selected message bubble from the thread.
Lock/Unlock message: locks or unlocks the currently selected message bubble from being accidentally deleted.
Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message bubble to an external recipient.
Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as a single text message within the SIM card.
View message details: displays details for the currently selected message bubble.
Translate: translates the text from the currently selected bubble into a desired language. Messages 111 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Deleting a single message bubble 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Open a message to reveal the message string. 3. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select Delete
. message. 4. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit. Deleting multiple message bubbles 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Open a message to reveal the message string. 3. Press 4. Place a check mark on the individual bubbles targeted and then tap Delete messages. for deletion or choose Select all. 5. Tap Delete to erase or Cancel to exit. Deleting Messages Deleting a single message thread 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Touch and hold a message from the Messages list,
. then select Delete thread. 3. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit. Deleting multiple message threads 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A check and then tap Delete threads. mark displays beside each selected message. 4. Tap Delete. 5. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the process. 112 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Message Search You can search through your messages by using the Message Search feature. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in and then tap Search. which to search, then tap
. 4. All messages that contain the entered search string display. Messaging Settings To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia messages, Voice mails, and Push messages. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press
. and then tap Settings. The following Messaging settings are available:
General settings
Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is reached, rather than overwriting them.
Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text messages are allowed in one conversation.
Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation. Text message (SMS) settings
Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered.
Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the messages stored on the SIM card.
Message center: allows you to enter the number of your message center where your messages reside while the system is attempting to deliver them.
Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text messages. Choose from: GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or Automatic. Multimedia message (MMS) settings
Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered.
Read reports: when this option is activated, your phone receives a request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient.
Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve messages. Messages 113 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Roaming auto retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve while roaming.
Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode: Free, Restricted, or Warning. Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain. Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content Domain. Free: you may add any content to the message.
MMS alert: alerts you when the messaging modes changes from an SMS (text) to MMS (multimedia) mode. Display
Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that surround each message.
Background style: allows you to choose from several background styles for your messages.
Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by using the up or down volume keys. 114 Push message settings
Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from the network.
Service loading: allows you to set the type of service loading notification. Choose from: Always, Prompt, or Never. Notification settings
Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your status bar.
Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message notifications.
Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated with message alerts.
Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every 10 minutes.
Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a brief preview of new message text on the Status bar. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Emergency message settings
Emergency alerts: allows you to configure emergency alert settings. You can enable/disable those alert categories you wish to receive. Choose from: Imminent extreme alert, Imminent severe alert, and AMBER alerts. Note: The Presidential alert can not be disabled.
Emergency notification preview: allows you to play a sample emergency alert tone. Tap Stop to cancel the playback. Signature settings
Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.
Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your message. Spam message settings
Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure available spam settings such as:
Add to spam numbers: allows you to manually enter and assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source. Add to spam phrases: allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend. Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers. Emergency Alert Configuration This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS); which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network (PLAN). If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be available. For more information, please contact your wireless provider. Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within their area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency Alert message. Messages 115 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential There are three types of Emergency Alerts:
Alerts issued by the President
Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life
AMBER Alerts (missing child alert) Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts, Severe Alerts, and AMBER Alerts. Important! Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled. Assigning Messages as Spam You can now assign either a phone number as spam or use a key term or phrase. Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with your Spam messages folder. To assign a phone number from Messages list as spam:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Touch and hold a message from a phone number. 3. Select Add to spam numbers and tap OK. To disable Extreme, Severe, and AMBER Alerts:
To assign a phone number manually as spam:
. and then tap Settings. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Scroll to the bottom and select Emergency alerts. All alerts are enabled by default (check mark showing). 4. Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove the check mark. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Locate and activate the Spam settings option. and then tap Settings.
Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure available spam settings such as:
4. Tap Add to spam numbers
(Add).
This function allows you to manually enter and assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source. 116 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 5. Tap the Number field to manually enter phone number. 4. Tap Add to spam phrases
(Add). or Tap Contacts. to select from either your existing Logs or or Tap Match criteria and select a parameter that must match for the spam action to take effect. Choose from:
Same as, Starts with (ex: 800 or 888), Ends with, or includes. 6. Tap Save. To register text phrases as spam:
Some incoming messages might not be associated with a phone number but rather an email address. In these cases, the only way to block those messages, would be assign a key used term or phrase to activate the Spam block. Ex:
Dear friend, Stock Alert, or Act Now. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Locate and activate the Spam settings option. and then tap Settings.
This function allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend. 5. Enter a term or word into the field. Note: The term is case sensitive. Ex: Act Now is not the same as act now. 6. Tap Save. To register unknown numbers as spam:
Some incoming messages might not be associated with either a phone number or email address. These incoming messages contain no information as their info is blocked by the sender. and then tap Settings. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Locate and activate the Spam settings option. 4. Tap Block unknown senders. A green check mark indicates the feature is active.
Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers. Messages 117 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential If an incoming message is designated in coming from an unknown sender, it is automatically assigned as spam and is now located in your Spam folder. Accessing Your Spam Folder Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with your Spam messages folder. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press and then tap Spam messages. Text Templates This screen displays your available text message reply templates. This is a readily accessible list of both default and user-defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. From the Messaging list, press
. and then tap Text templates. 3. Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current message conversation. 118 To create your own text template:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. From the Messaging list, press
. Text templates. and then tap 3. Tap 4. Enter a new text string and tap Save.
(Create text template). Using Email Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email using several email services. You can also receive text message alerts when you receive an important email. Your phones Email application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one convenient location. There are currently three main types of email accounts on your phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook). To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current standard.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs (Internet service providers) and common among consumer applications. POP3 is the current standard.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync - This protocol is frequently used with a large corporate email server system and provides access to email, contact, and calendar synchronization. Creating an Internet Email Account Apps 1. From the Home screen, tap 2.
(Email). If you already have other email account setup:
Open an existing email account, press
(Add account). Settings and then tap Account name Access available accounts and folders Email functions or Enter your Email address and Password information.
Email address: your Internet email address.
Password: typically your network access password
(case-sensitive). Messages 119 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 3. Tap Show password to display the password as you 6. At the Set up email screen, name the account and enter enter it in the associated field.
Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually (POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the information specific to your email provider.
Tap Send email from this account by default to assign this email account as your default account for all outgoing emails. 4. Tap Next. 5. At the Account options screen, select the frequency which the device should check for new email on the server and tap Next. Important! The Sync Email feature must be enabled to allow synching between your device and the remote server.
Tap the Notify me when email arrives field to receive new email notifications.
Tap the Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi-Fi field to assist with faster access to large email attachments when using Wi-Fi. 120 a screen name to identify yourself on this account.
The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from other email accounts accessed by your device. 7. Tap Done to store the new account. Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You can also view Personal information for this account, Receipts (if you setup the account to return receipts), Travel information, and more (if available). Opening an Email 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap
(account name field upper-left) to open
(Email). the complete email account list page.
Selecting Combined view allows you to view all the emails for your current accounts, managed by the application, to be listed on a single screen. 3. Select an email account and tap an email message. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Refreshing Email messages 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Select an email account.
(Email).
If you are already in an email account, tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the complete email account list page.
Select an available email account. 3. Tap
(Refresh). Composing Email 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap
(account name field upper-left) to open
(Email). the complete email account list page. 3. Tap Inbox 4. Enter the recipients email address in the To field.
(Compose).
If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message recipients as you want. 5. Tap Add Cc/Bcc to add additional carbon copy and blind copy recipients.
Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.
Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients. 6. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject. 7. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
To add an attachment (such as image, video, audio, etc..), Attach (from the top of the screen) and make a tap category selection. Tap the file you wish to attach. Tap to delete the attached file. Note: If you attach an image to your email, you have the option to resize it prior to delivery. Choose from: Original, Large (70%), Medium (30%), or Small (10%). Once chosen, tap either Always or Just once. 8. Tap
(Save) to store a draft of the current email on your device so that you can come back later and continue the email. 9. Tap 10. Once complete, tap
(Delete) to discard the current email.
(Send). Messages 121 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
(Email). addresses.
Spam addresses: allows you to create a list of spam email
Rules for filtering: allows you to create and manage filters for emails. Filter parameters include: Filter name, Subject includes, or From. and then tap Settings Account settings or Press
<Account>. Alter any of the following settings:
Sync settings to configure the following sync options:
Sync Email: enables automatic email synching between your device and the remote server. Sync schedule: allows you to control the email sync schedule on both Peak and Off-Peak times. Size to retrieve emails: configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction. Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually. Configuring Email Settings 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Select an account. 3. Press and then tap Settings and alter any of the following General settings:
Display settings: allows you to configure the way in which your email list displays. Options include: Auto fit content, Message preview line, and Title line list.
Compose and send settings: allows you to configure the functions available during both creating and sending emails. Options include: Quick responses, Default image size, Delay email sending.
Priority send settings: allows you to assign Contacts as priority senders, configure a priority sender inbox, assign email notifications, ringotnes, and vibration pattrerns for emails from these senders.
Auto advance: allows you to assign an action after an email is deleted. Choose from: Next email, Previous email, or Email list.
Confirm deletions: requires that you provide confirmation before deleting a selected email. 122 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails. In a single motion touch and slide the Signature slider to the right to turn it on.
Always Cc/Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails.
Show images: allows you to view embedded images located Tap the Signature field, change the current text, and tap OK to within the body of the currently displayed email. save the new signature.
Default account: Assign this account as the default email account used for outgoing messages.
Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to display on the status bar when you receive a new email (Gmail, etc..).
Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received.
Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is received. 4. Tap the More settings field to access additional options:
Account name: displays your uniquely created account display name.
Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your outgoing email messages.
Number of emails to load: allows you to select the number of on-screen emails to keep loaded on the screen by default.
Auto download attachments: allows the device to automatically download email attachments when an active Wi-Fi connection is detected. This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G/LTE network connection.
Auto resend times: enables the device to resend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails.
Security options: allows you to enable several security options such as: Encrypt all, Sign all, Create keys, Private keys, Public keys, and Set default key. These security policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers. Security policy list: lists the current emails security policy. These policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers. Messages 123 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Incoming settings: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such as User name, Password, IMAP server, Security type, Port, and IMAP path prefix.
Outgoing settings: Lets you specify outgoing email settings, such as SMTP server, Security type, Port, Require sign-in, User name, or Password. Note: Some the above options may not be displayed when using some Internet account types. Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook) Your phone also provides access to your companys Outlook Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email application to wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and Calendar information directly with your companys Exchange server. 124 Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. If you already have other email account setup:
Open an existing email account, press
(Add account). Settings and then tap
(Email). or Enter your Email address and Password information.
Email address: your Outlook work email address.
Password: typically your network access password
(case-sensitive). 3. Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in the associated field. 4. Tap Send email from this account by default, to make this your default email account for outbound emails. Note: If selected, the Manual setup button changes to read Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. If activated, skip to step 6. 5. Tap Next. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for further details and support. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 6. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new email account screen). Note: If prompted with an on-screen notification that the connection that the Setup could not finish, tap Edit details to continue with a manual update of necessary information. 7. When prompted to provide additional detailed information within the Exchange server settings screen, enter an updated Domain, and confirm your user name and Password information. Important! Remember to manually place the cursor in the correct spot and enter a Domain name before the
[Domain]\[user name] entry. Most servers only provide a username. 8. Update or re-enter your Exchange server information within the appropriate field. This field can often be populated with incorrect or out of date information provided by your server.
Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email address. Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this information from your company network administrator. Important! Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on returned information.
If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Use secure connection (SSL) field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level. Most often, this option should be enabled. Important! If your Exchange server requires this feature, leaving this field unchecked can prevent connection. 9. Consult your IT Administrator if it is necessary to enable the Use client certification option. 10. With the new server information entered, tap Next. 11. Read the on-screen Activation disclaimer and, when prompted, tap OK. The device then verifies your incoming server settings. Messages 125 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 12. If prompted, read the Remote security administration information and tap OK to accept the service and continue. 13. Adjust the various Account options configuration fields and tap Next. It may take a few seconds for the next screen to load.
Enabling the Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi-Fi option decreases the wait time to access large email attachments. 14. If prompted, read the Activate device administrator?
screen and tap Activate to complete the email setup process. Note: This process can take a few minutes. If the previous setup screen re-appears, ignore it and do not alter any fields during this process. 15. Identify your new work email account with a unique name (Ex: Work), then tap Done. 126 Opening an Exchange Email 1. From the Home screen, tap
(Email). 2. Tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the complete email account list page. 3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email message. Refreshing Exchange Email 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Select an email account.
(Email).
If you are already in an email account, tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the complete email account list page.
Select an available email account. 3. Tap
(Refresh). Composing Exchange Email For more information, refer to Composing Email on page 121. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Deleting an Exchange Email Message Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and select Delete from the on-screen context menu. or With the email message displayed, tap
(Delete). Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area. 2. Tap the Microsoft Exchange account. 3. Press and then tap Settings and alter any of the following General settings:
Display settings: allows you to configure the way in which your email list displays. Options include: Auto fit content, Message preview line, and Title line list.
Compose and send settings: allows you to configure the functions available during both creating and sending emails. Options include: Quick responses, Default image size, Delay email sending.
Priority send settings: allows you to assign Contacts as priority senders, configure a priority sender inbox, assign email notifications, ringotnes, and vibration pattrerns for emails from these senders.
Auto advance: allows you to assign an action after an email is deleted. Choose from: Next email, Previous email, or Email list.
Confirm deletions: requires that you provide confirmation before deleting a selected email.
Spam addresses: allows you to create a list of spam email addresses.
Rules for filtering: allows you to create and manage filters for emails. Filter parameters include: Filter name, Subject includes, or From. or Press
<Microsoft Account>. Alter any of the following settings:
and then tap Settings Account settings
Sync settings to configure the following sync options:
Sync Email: enables automatic email synching between your device and the remote server. Messages 127 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Sync schedule: allows you to control the email sync schedule
Default account: Assign this account as the default email on both Peak and Off-Peak times. Period to sync email to assign the sync range for your incoming and outgoing email messages between your phone and your external exchange server. How many days worth of email messages should the phone and server synchronize. Choose from: Automatic, All, 1 day, 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month. Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction. Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually.
Signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails. In a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on. Tap the Signature field, change the current text, and tap Done to save the new signature.
Out of office settings allows you to both activate/deactivate your emails out of office settings, and configure both the start/end dates and your outgoing message. account used for outgoing messages.
Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to display on the status bar when a new email is received.
Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received.
Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is received. 4. Tap the More settings field to access additional options:
Account name displays the name used by the device to track the account.
Always Cc/Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails.
Show images: allows you to view embedded images located within the body of the currently displayed email.
Auto download attachments: allows the device to automatically download email attachments when an active Wi-Fi connection is detected. This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G/LTE network connection. 128 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Auto resend times enables the phone to resend an outgoing
In case of sync conflict allows you to assign the master email a specified number of times if delivery fails. The default is 3 auto resends.
Folder sync settings allows you to configure the sync settings for various folders such as Inbox, Drafts, Outbox, etc..
Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync calendar events. Choose from: 2 weeks, 1 month, 3 months, 6 months, or All calendar.
Empty server trash: allows you to delete your email accounts trash bin remotely.
Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between your device and the remote exchange server.
Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries between your device and the remote exchange server.
Sync Task synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your device and the remote exchange server. source on emails. If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can assign the server as the main source for all emails (Server has priority) or assign the phone to be the main source and update the server accordingly (Device has priority).
Security options: allows you to enable several security options such as: Encryption, Encryption algorithm, Sign, Sign algorithms, Email certificates, and Security policy list. These security policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers. Security policy list: lists the current emails security policy. These policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers.
Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain\user name, Password, and Exchange server settings. 5. Press to return to the previous page. Messages 129 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using Google Mail Google Mail (Gmail) is Googles web-based email. When you first setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized with your Gmail account. Signing into Google Mail 1. From the Home screen, tap
(Gmail). Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features such as Google Mail and Play Store. 2. Tap New if you do not have a Google account. or Tap Existing if you have a Google account. The Inbox loads conversations and email. Opening Gmail 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap an existing email message.
(Gmail). Refreshing Gmail Mail From within the Gmail message list, tap
(Refresh) at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen, send and receive new emails, and synchronize your email with the Gmail account. Other Gmail Options 1. From the main Gmail screen, tap
(Labels) at the bottom of the screen to set up and manage Labels for your Gmail messages. 2. From the main Gmail screen, tap
(Search) at the bottom of the screen to search through your Gmail messages. Composing a Gmail Message 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. From the Gmail Inbox, tap
(Gmail).
(Compose) at the bottom of the screen to create a new message. 3. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field. Tip: Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma. 130 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. Press and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or 2. Press to select one of the following additional blind copy. 5. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field. 6. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your message. 7. Once complete tap
(Send). Viewing a Gmail Message 1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view the
: archives the selected Email. following options located at the bottom of the screen:
Archive
Delete
Labels
Mark as Unread
: deletes the currently selected Email.
: assigns a label to the current Email.
: tags the current message as unread and returns you to the Google Mail Inbox.
Newer: swiping to the right displays newer Emails.
Older: swiping to the left displays older Emails. options:
Mark important/Mark not important: assigns the current email an important status.
Mute: mutes the conversation.
Report spam: reports the Email message as spam.
Report phishing: reports the Email message as a phishing email attempt.
Settings: allows you to configure the General, or Notification settings.
Send feedback: sends feedback to Google.
Help: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help information. Creating an Additional Gmail Account 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press and then tap Settings ADD ACCOUNT and
(Gmail). follow the same steps as referenced in the previous section. For more information, refer to Signing into Google Mail on page 130. Messages 131 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+. 1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 19 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps
(Google+). 3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+. or Tap Add account to create another account. Hangouts Previously known as Google Talk, is an updated place to hangout, share photos, and even video calls. This is a free web-based application for instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. Note: Before using this application, you must first have an active Gmail account available and be currently logged in. 1. From the Home screen, tap
(Hangouts). Note: If you are not already logged into Google, refer to the instructions for signing in on page 130. 2. When prompted, read the on-screen information and confirm your phone number is correct before using the application. Tap Confirm. Note: Confirming your phone number does not make it publicly available. 132 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 5. When prompted, configure the photo backup parameters as desired and tap Done. 6. Tap from the upper-left of the screen and select from an available list of features such as: Find People, Communities, Hangouts, etc.. To create a new message:
1. Tap from the upper-left of the screen and select Messenger. 2. Tap 3. to start a new message. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or circle. In the bottom Type a message field, enter a message then tap
(Send). 4. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+. 5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information. Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation. When you get a new conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your device. 1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information, refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 19. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps
(Messenger). or From the Google+ application, select Messenger. 3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google+. or Tap Add account to create another account. 4. When prompted, follow the on-screen procedures to configure the Sync contacts parameters. Messages 133 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 7: Multimedia This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your device, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, Samsung Link, and how to manage your photos, images and sounds. You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG format. Important! Do not take photos of people without their permission. Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed. Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with another persons privacy. Note: An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since there is already built-in storage. 134 Assigning the Default Storage Location Important! Too many users can overlook this storage location until something goes wrong. It is recommended that you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Camera. 2. Press and then tap Settings Settings and scroll up to the Storage entry. 3. Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos. Choose from: Device or Memory card. Note: The recommended setting is to the Memory card.. 4. Press to return to the Home screen. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using the Camera Taking Photos Taking pictures with your devices built-in camera is as simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the camera key. Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows may display on the photo. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Camera. 2. Using the devices main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject. Note: On your initial activation of the camera, firmware configuration can take up to 1 minute. This is a one time process. 3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up to x4 (400 percent). or Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to zoom in. 4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap on-screen icons to access various camera options and settings. 5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area of interest. 6. Tap Camera until the shutter sounds. (The picture is automatically stored within your designated storage location (page 134). If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored on the Phone.) For more information, refer to Camera Options on page 136. Multimedia 135 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Camera Options Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen. 1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Mode button to change the mode to one of the following:
MODE Auto: Use this mode to automatically adjust the exposure, color, and brightness settings. This mode allows single image shots or burst shots. Beauty face: Use this to take photos with lightened faces for gentler images. Best photo: Use this to take multiple photos in a short time, and then choose the best photos among them. Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap and hold thumbnails of photos to save, and then tap Done. Continuous shot: Use this to take pictures continuously at a rate of 3 per second. You can take up to 20 continuous pictures at a time. Note: Touch and hold to take a burst shot. These are saved using a Fine image quality. Self-portrait Camera mode Quick Settings Battery Charge Take Picture Effects Mode (Change) Record video button Image viewer Viewfinder 136 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Best face: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same 2. The following shortcuts display on the camera screen :
time and combine them to create the best possible image. Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap the yellow frame on each face, and choose the best individual face for the subject. After choosing a pose for each individual, tap Done to merge the images into a single photo, and tap Save. Sound & shot: Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding background sounds for a few seconds. The background sound is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo. Rich tone (HDR): Use this to take photos with richer colors and contrasts. Panorama: Use this to take wide panoramic photos. Press the Shutter button to take a photo, and then move the camera in any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the preview screen, the camera automatically takes another shot in the panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, press the Shutter button again. Sports: Use this to take fast action photos. Night: Use this to take brighter, clearer pictures in low light settings without the use of the flash. Focus area: displays the area of the image used as the main focus area. If the image is too close, the square will turn red. Self portrait: allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself. Quick Settings: activates the Quick Settings menu bar from where you can select several additional settings.For more information, refer to Quick Settings on page 138 Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected picture. The last picture you took, displays as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon. Effects/Downloads: provides access to pre-installed and downloaded effects. Default effects include:
No effect, Vignette, Grey-scale, Sepia, Vintage, Faded color, Turquoise, Tint, Cartoon, Moody, Rugged, Oil pastel, and Fisheye. Multimedia 137 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Camcorder button: shoots a video when pressed. Camera button: takes a photo when pressed in Camera mode. Quick Settings Tap at the top of the display to quickly change Camera settings. Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. The available options vary by mode. Camera settings: configure Camera settings. MODE Mode button: allows you to select from different camera modes. Flash: activate or deactivate the flash. Storage location/Connection Status: indicates the device is connected to an adapter and the current storage location for images (Phone or Memory card) on the device. Voice control: activate or deactivate the voice control to take photos. Timer: sets a delay timer. Selections are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. Recording mode: select a resolution for videos. Choose from: Normal, Limit for MMS, Slow motion, or Fast motion. Share functions: activate or deactivate the sharing options. Choose from Off, Share Shot, or Buddy photo share. 138 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Share shot - Shooting mode: lists the current shooting modes available from with the Share Shot mode. Choose from Easy connect, Wi-Fi Direct, or Cancel. Quick Settings: hide Quick settings. Camera and Camcorder Settings This section describes the different settings that you can configure on your camera. Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. The available options vary by mode. 1. From the viewfinder, tap Quick Settings Camera Settings. 2. The follow settings are located under the Camera, Camcorder, and General tabs. The settings that are displayed will depend on what camera mode you are in. Camera:
Photo size: Select a resolution for photos. Use higher resolution for higher quality. Higher resolution photos take up more memory.
Face detection: allows you to adjust the camera focus based on face detection technology.
Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or meters the light source: Center-weighted, Matrix, or Spot.
ISO: determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, or 400. Use a lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.
Anti-shake: compensates for camera movement. Camcorder:
Video size: Select a resolution for videos. Use higher resolution for higher quality. Higher resolution videos take up more memory. Multimedia 139 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects.
Flash: activate or deactivate the flash.
Voice control: activates/deactivates voice control feature that allows you to verbally take a photo.
Contextual filename: allows you to have your location added as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag described above.
Storage: Select the memory location for storage.
Reset: Reset the camera settings. Settings:
GPS tag: attach a GPS location tag to the photo. To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather conditions. Your location may display on your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.
Review: set this option if you want to view each picture after you take it. Select a time value.
Volume key: assigns a function to the volume key. Choose from The zoom key, The camera key, or The record key.
Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. You can set the timer to Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life color range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras.
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider. 140 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various options. Photo viewing options 1. Tap a thumbnail to view the picture. Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them. 2. The following options are available at the top of the screen:
Change player
: allows you to select a different streaming device from your available list.
Share via
: allows you to share the picture via Group Play, Add to Dropbox, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Hangouts, Messaging, Picasa, Share by Samsung UI, and Wi-Fi Direct.
Edit
: (when in Landcsape mode) allows you to edit the current image. Launches the Photo Editor application. For more information, refer to Editing a Photo on page 151 Note: The photo editor application is not preloaded and must be downloaded from the Play Store or via Samsung Apps.
Delete
: allows you to delete the current picture. 3. Press for additional options such as:
Edit: (while in Portrait mode), allows you to assign the current image as a favorite. Favorite: allows you to assign the current image as a favorite. Slideshow: allows you to see your photos in a slideshow. Photo frame: takes the current image and creates a surrounding photo frame that can be edited with edited text or drawn object, then saved. Photo note: allows you to write notes on your current image and then save it. Copy to clipboard allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different folder. Print: allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung printer. Rename: allows you to rename the current file. Multimedia 141 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Set as: allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo, Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens. Buddy photo share: allows you to share the current image with active buddies. Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a counterclockwise direction. Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a clockwise direction. Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current picture. Tap Done to update the image with the new dimensions or tap Cancel to ignore any changes. Set as: allows you to assign the current image as either a Contact photo, Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens. Details: files details such as Title, Time, Width, Height, Orientation, File Size, and Path. Settings: provides access to the Gallery options menu. Choose from SNS data management and Tags. Video viewing options Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them. 1. Tap a video to select it. 2. Tap to play the video.
Change player
: allows you to select a different streaming device from your available list.
Share via
: allows you to share the video via ChatON, Add to Dropbox, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Picassa, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.
Trim
: activates the Trim feature so that you can edit the length of the current video.
Delete
: allows you to delete the current video. Choose either OK or Cancel. 3. Press for additional options. 142 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using the Camcorder In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send high definition videos. Shooting Video Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by having the light source behind you. Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to a memory card with a slow transfer speed. 1. From the Home screen, tap Camera to activate the camera mode. Apps 2. Using the cameras main display screen as a viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject. 3. Before you take a video, use the Volume control buttons to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up to x4 (400 percent). Note: Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread/
pinch the screen to zoom in or out. For more information, refer to Navigating Through the Screens on page 44 4. Tap the Video key (
) to begin shooting video. The red light will blink while recording. 5. Tap anywhere on the screen to re-focus the camcorder on that object. The camcorder auto-focuses on the new target area. 6. Tap the Stop key (
) to stop the recording and save the video file to your Camera album. or Tap the Pause key (
) to pause the recording. 7. Once the file is saved, tap the image viewer, then tap
(Play) to playback your video for review. 8. Press to return to the viewer. Multimedia 143 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Accessing Videos When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder. You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in the Camera folder. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Gallery. 2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video playback. 3. Tap Play to begin video playback. or Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to select the video (indicated by a colored border) and display the following video menu context options:
Share via
: allows you to share the video via Add to Dropbox, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Picassa, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.
Delete
: allows you to delete the current video. Choose either OK or Cancel. or 144 Touch and hold a listed video file to place a check mark alongside and then press for additional options:
Slideshow: allows you to see your files in a slideshow or access the slideshow settings. Hide items: allows you to hide the current file from appearing in the Gallery. or With the video displayed on-screen (but not playing), press for additional options:
Favorite: tags the current video as a favorite file. Slideshow Rename: allows you to rename the filename of the currently selected video. Details: displays video file information. Settings: provide access to the Galley settings page. From this page you can configure the SNS data management and Tag options. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Sharing Pictures Pictures are the best way of remembering the moment, but an even better treat is to share them with others. Two new features allow you to either instantly share a series of pictures as they are taken or quickly share a picture without using email or messaging.
Share Shot is a great way to instantly share a series of pictures among a group of users. The best example for this feature is having multiple users instantly sharing each others pictures at a company or family gathering. As each person takes a separate picture with their own device, they are all pooled together and instantly display in each users Gallery. No more Email your pictures to me later. Each person walks out of the event with all the pictures taken by everyone. This method of image transfer requires that both devices have Wi-Fi Direct active and be paired prior to use. Note: You can only share a shot with other external users who also have their Wi-Fi Direct feature active.
S Beam Transfer uses the NFC (near Field Communication) feature found on your device to transmit large files directly to another compatible device by direct touch. This method of image transfer requires that you enable NFC and S Beam prior to use. For more information, refer to Using S Beam to Share Pictures on page 147 Enabling Share Shot Share shot is a Wi-Fi Direct group sharing feature where multiple users can Wi-Fi connect their devices and then all share each others pictures in real-time. This is really useful in group events (ex: family gathering or company party) where you dont want to have to email everyone later and make sure you all can share your pics at a later date. For more information, refer to Wi-Fi Direct Setup and Settings on page 238 The general process is:
Enable Wi-Fi Direct communication
Pair your device with other users
Enable Share shot Multimedia 145 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To enable Wi-Fi Direct:
Important! The target device must already be connected to the same Wi-Fi and have its Wi-Fi Direct feature active and scanning before you can your pairing. 1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab. 2. Slide the Wi-Fi slider to the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status. 3. Tap Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Direct. Your device automatically scans and lists Wi-Fi Direct compatible devices. or Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin the connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device. or Tap Multi-connect names to begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi Direct compatible devices. Scan and select all the device 146 Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and running before it is detected by your device. 4. Tap Done. The direct connection is established. Confirm displays in the Status bar. 5. The recipient taps OK when prompted to complete the connection. Your status field now displays Connected and your connected device is listed on the screen. 6. Each partner (including yourself) taps Accept to consent to the new Wi-Fi Direct pairing. To enable Share shot on Camera:
1. From the Home screen, tap Camera 2. Share Quick Settings If you are prompted to activate your Wi-Fi Direct connection, tap OK and follow the activation procedures for Wi-Fi Direct. Share shot. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To configure your Share Shot options:
1. Confirm the Share Shot viewfinder is active and Shooting modes displays at the top of the screen. 2. Tap Devices for sharing with to display list of current share shot participants. 3. Tap a participants entry and remove the green check mark to stop sharing images with select participants. 4. Tap Shooting modes to regain access to the Share menu. 5. Tap Shooting modes Off to disable share shot while maintaining a Wi-Fi Direct connection. To take share shot images:
1. Tap 2. From the Home screen, tap Camera until the shutter sounds. Apps Gallery to locate your newly shot images located in their default storage location. 3. Confirm Share shot images delivered/received displays in the Notifications area of the screen. Using S Beam to Share Pictures This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam large files directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and videos from your gallery, music files from your music player, and more. 1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab. 2. If not already active, touch and slide the NFC slider to the right to turn it on. 3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on. 4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on. 5. On the source device (containing the desired image or video), tap Apps Gallery. 6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the preview window. Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying the Lock screen. They must both be active and unlocked. It is recommended that the target device be on the Home screen. Multimedia 147 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back To share multiple pictures via S Beam:
to begin. Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not display on the source device:
- Separate the devices
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on the source device (providing the file)
- Place the device back to back again 8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image preview to begin the transfer. After a few seconds
(depending on file size) the recipient sees the transferred file displayed on their screen. 1. On the source device (containing the desired image or video), tap Apps Gallery. 2. Locate the selected folder. 3. Touch and hold the first image to place a check mark on it and touch each desired image. 4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back to begin. 5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image preview to begin the transfer. 6. When prompted, separate the two devices. 148 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Camera Gallery Options The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera images. Gallery. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Select a folder location (ex: Camera) and tap an image Apps to open it. or Touch and hold an image to place a box around the file and select multiple files. or Tap the upper-right camera to begin taking pictures that are placed in this folder. or 3. Tap the on-screen image to use additional image menu options. For more information, refer to Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options on page 141 Sharing a Gallery Image to a Target Device Important! Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the same Wi-Fi. 1. Launch Samsung Link on the target device (such as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.). 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps Gallery. Note: You must sign in to your Samsung Account before you can use this feature. 3. Open a selected image. 4. Tap
(Stream to connected devices) and select an available target device to begin streaming. 5. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the on-screen Allow button to continue. Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share media with the external source. Multimedia 149 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo Apps 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it. Contact photo. 3. Press 4. Tap a contact in which to assign this image. 5. Using the on-screen crop feature, crop the image by and then tap Set as Gallery. dragging it around or out from its corners. 6. Tap Done to store the new image. 6. Confirm AllShare Controller enabled displays in the Notification area at the top of the device. This icon indicates that you are using your device as the media source. Taking a Screen Shot Also known as a screen capture, this feature allows you to mimic the print screen function on most computers. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Motions and gestures. 2. Touch and slide the Palm motion slider to the right to turn it on. Note: At least one feature must be activated before Palm motion can be activated. 3. Slide a features activation slider to the ON position. 4. Display the screen you want to capture, then place the side of your palm along the one side of the device and then slowly swipe it in the opposite direction over the screen. 150 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper Apps 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it. and then tap Set as. 3. Press 4. Select one of the these options:
Gallery.
Contact photo assigns the current image as a Contact photo.
Home screen assigns the current image to the home screen background. This image is spread across all available screens.
Lock screen assigns the selected image to the background for the lock screen.
Home and lock screens assigns the current image to both the Home screen and Lock screens. 5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture. Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a cropped area. 6. Tap Done to assign the wallpaper image. or Tap Cancel to stop without updating the wallpaper image. Editing a Photo You can edit your photos using the built-in Photo editor application on your device. The photo editor application provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on your phone. Along with basic image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color it also provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it. 3. Press and then tap Edit. Apps Gallery.
Drawing: allows you to draw on top of the photo.
Frame: adds a frame style to this photo. 4. Select an image area by touching and holding the image and then selecting an available option:
Edit image: edits the image after you select the action in which to edit.
Selection mode: provides several on-screen selection options such as: Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and Selection mode (Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and Selection mode).
Select all: select the entire area of the current image. Multimedia 151 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Clipboard: copies the currently selected are to your devices clipboard. 5. Use the following editor controls to edit your picture:
Previous: lets you undo the current operation. Next: lets you redo the previous operation. Cancel/Delete: exits the current photo editing session. Save: stores the currently edited photo. Rotate: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4 directions. You can also mirror image a photo. Crop: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a photo. Color: allows you to Auto adjust color, Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, Adjust RGB, Temperature, Exposure, and Hue of a photo. Effects: allows you to add various effects to your photo. 152 Portrait: allows you to apply various face correction effects such as: Red-eye fix, Airbrush face, Face brightness, Out-of-focus, Beauty face, Funny face, or Spot healing. Sticker: allows you to place various pre-created on-screen stickers atop your current image. Drawing: allows you to add draw directly on your current picture by using either a brush/pen or eraser. Frame: places a pre-created border style atop your current image. 6. Press to access the following options:
Save as: allows you to rename your current image and save it to your gallery.
Select image: allows you to select a new image for editing.
Take picture: allows you to activate the camera and take a new image for editing. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Share via: allows you to share your saved photo via Add to Dropbox, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Group Play, Hangouts, Memo, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.
Set as: assigns the currently saved image as either a: Contact photo, Home and lock screens, Home screen, or Lock screen. The Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as a picture message. Note: If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the Gallery, access Files and remove some of the media files from the folders, and then open the Gallery. Opening the Gallery From the Home screen, tap Apps Gallery. For more information, refer to Camera Gallery Options on page 149 Note: If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage card, Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top left album contains all the pictures in the storage card. Multimedia 153 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Connecting AllShare Cast Hub To connect your AllShare Cast Hub hardware:
Screen Mirroring
(with Hub accessory) This feature functions with an external AllShareCast Hub to fully mirror what is currently displayed on your device to the external TV. 1. Connect the AllShare Cast Hub to a power source using the USB Travel Adapter. Note: The status LED begins to blink solid red to indicate the startup process has begun. Viewing a Video within the Gallery 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Locate your folder and video. 3. Tap
(Play) to playback your video. Apps Gallery. AllShare Cast Hub This hardware allows you to enjoy whats currently on your device directly on your TV. Note: There is no need to be connected to a Wi-Fi network or to be logged into your Samsung Account to use this feature. AllShare Cast Hub establishes a WI-Fi Direct connection between the device and the hub. For more information about this device, go to:
http://www.samsung.com/us/mobile/cell-phones-accessories/EAD-
T10JDEGSTA 154 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To activate Screen Mirroring on your device:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap 2. Connections tab Screen Settings Mirroring. If not already on, tap the Screen Mirroring and then move the slider to the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status. LED Color/Patterns Red - Solid Red - Blinking Blue - Solid Description Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is booting or processing. Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is in standby mode (ready for connection). Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is ready to be connected with a new device. 2. Connect your TV to the AllShare Cast Hub via an HDMI cable (A-to-A cable). 3. Change the source input on your TV to match the input port used by the incoming HDMI cable. Note: The television screen should now display an on-screen tutorial showing you how to configure your devices AllShare Cast Hub and device settings. Multimedia 155 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Accessing Applications Home, then touch 1. Press Apps tab. The Apps screen displays. Apps, and the 2. Sweep your finger right or left to scroll the Apps screens. 3. Touch the applications icon to launch the app. Downloading and Installing Apps Find new apps to download and install on your device:
Play Store: For more information, refer to Play Store on page 194.
Samsung Apps: For more information, refer to Samsung Apps on page 201. Section 8: Applications and Widgets This section contains a description of each application and widget that is available in the Apps and Widget menus, the function, and how to launch that particular application or widget. If the application or widget is already described in another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that particular section is provided. Note: This manual only addresses applications that were loaded on your device as of the date of purchase. Information concerning third party applications that you may choose to download from the Google Play Store or other sources should be obtained from the application provider directly and not from Samsung. Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-
used applications to one of the Home screens. (For details, see Home Screen on page 38.) You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that will display on all Home screens. If you add an application as a primary shortcut, the application icon will not be displayed in the Apps menu. 156 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Customizing the Applications Screens Choosing a view By default, application icons display in Customizable grid view. You can change the view to Alphabetical grid view or Alphabetical list view. 1. From the Apps screen, touch Menu View type. The available options are:
Customizable grid: Arrange application icons in the order you prefer.
Alphabetical grid: Application icons automatically arranged in alphabetical order.
Alphabetical list: Application icons automatically listed in alphabetical order. Moving Application icons With the Apps screen in Customizable grid view, you can arrange the application icons to suit yourself. 1. From the Apps screen, touch Menu, then touch Edit. Note: The Edit option is not available with the Apps screen View type set to Alphabetical list. 2. Touch and hold an application icon, then drag it to a new location. 3. Touch Save when you are finished. Filtering Application icons You can select which icons display in the Apps screen. From the Apps screen, touch either of the following options:
Downloaded applications: Shows only those applications you Menu, then touch have downloaded and installed on your phone.
Hide applications: Mark those applications you do not want to display on the Apps screen by touching their icons (check marks display in their check boxes), then touch Done. The Apps screen displays without the hidden applications. Applications and Widgets 157 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Applications List Calculator Use your phones Calculator to perform arithmetical calculations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division). 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Calculator. 2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric keys. 3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key. 4. Enter the second number. 5. To view the result, touch equals (=). 6. To view calculator history, touch located at the top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past calculations displays. Touch display the calculator keypad. again to 7. To clear the calculator history, touch Menu Clear history. 8. To change the text size, touch Touch Small, Medium, or Large. Menu Text size. 158 9. To display the scientific calculator, rotate your phone to the landscape (horizontal) position. Calendar Record events and appointments to manage your schedule. Tip: A Calendar widget is available in Widgets. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Calendar. 2. Touch a tab to choose a calendar view:
Year: Display the current year and scroll to other years.
Month: Display the current month and scroll to other months.
Week: Display the current week, and scroll to other weeks.
Day: Display todays schedule, and scroll to other days.
List: Display events and tasks in a chronological list.
Task: Display tasks in a chronological list. Menu for these options:
3. Touch
Go to: Display a specific date.
Delete: Delete an event.
Sync: Synchronize your phones calendar with your account calendars. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Calendars: Displays the calendar types and edit them. You can Calendars: Select calendars to display. also add an account and calendar.
Settings: Customize the calendar. Customizing the Calendar 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Calendar.
Event notification:
Set alerts & notifications: Choose Alert to receive alerts, Status bar notification to display notifications in the Status bar, or Off for no notifications or alerts. Select ringtone: Choose a ringtone for event notifications, then 2. Touch Menu Settings to configure these touch OK. settings:
View settings:
View styles: Choose Month view style (Calendar view +
pop-up or Calendar view + list) and/or Week view (Timeline, Analog). First day of week: Choose a day to begin each week. Hide declined events: Enable or disable display of events. Lock time zone: When enabled, sets event times and dates to a specified time zone, so that times and dates will not change if you move to another time zone. Select time zone: When Lock time zone is enabled, specify the time zone for all events. Show week number: Display the number of the week (1 52) in a W column to the left of Sun. Vibration: Enable/disable vibration for event notifications. Quick responses: Pre-composed text to include with email notifications to meeting attendees, guests, and so on. Applications and Widgets 159 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Sending Events Send events as vCalendar files to other compatible devices. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Calendar. 2. Touch an event to display its details. 3. Touch 4. Select the desired Sharing method from the Share via Menu Share via. pop-up. 5. Follow the prompts to send a copy of a Calendar event to another device. Camera Use your 5 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG format. The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an MP4 format. Note: A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take pictures or shoot video. It is recommended that you confirm your default storage location for images and videos. From the Home screen, tap Apps Camera. For more information, refer to Using the Camera on page 135. 160 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential ChatON Provides a global mobile communication service where you can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share things such as pictures, videos, animation messages
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location information. For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. At the ChatON display, tap Sign in to sign in to your Apps ChatON . Samsung account if you have not already done so. For more information, refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 14 or Tap Skip if you have already signed in to your Samsung account. 3. Enter your real name and tap 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a buddy and OK. begin your chat session. Chrome The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google Chrome Web browser on your device. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Chrome. 2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap 3. Accept and Continue. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap Sign in to bring your open tabs, bookmarks, and omnibox data from your computer to your phone, otherwise tap No thanks. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google Chrome. Applications and Widgets 161 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential City ID Subscribe to City ID to display city and state for incoming calls and to look up city and state information for phone numbers. Note: City ID requires a subscription, after a limited free trial. From the Home screen, tap Apps City ID. Clock Here you can set an Alarm, configure and view the World clock, use a Stopwatch, set a Timer, or use a Desk Clock. The applications display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger. From the Home screen, tap Apps Clock. Setting an Alarm 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Clock. Create alarm. 2. From the Alarm tab, tap 3. Use the arrow symbols to enter adjust the hour, and minutes, then tap AM or PM (toggles depending on which was last selected). 162 4. Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times you want this alarm to repeat. Selections are:
day blocks or Repeat Weekly. Selected day blocks turn blue when active. 5. Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following:
Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, or Briefing. 6. Tap More to configure additional alarm settings such as volume slider, Alarm tone, Location alarm, Snooze, Smart alarm, and assign a name. To configure additional alarm settings:
1. Tap More to access additional alarm settings. 2. Tap the Alarm tone field and either select an available tone or select Add to use locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone. Tap OK to activate the ringtone. 3. Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the volume level plays. 4. Move the Location alarm slider to the right to activate the feature, then follow the on-screen instructions to enter a location. When activated, the alarm only sounds when you are at a specific location. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 5. Move the Snooze slider to the right to activate the feature. Tap the field to assign a Interval time
(3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 30 minutes) and Repeat (1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 5 times, and 10 times).
Interval indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications (snooze time).
Repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned to this alarm. How many times will the snooze silence the alarm. 6. Move the Smart alarm slider to the right to activate this feature which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of nature tones to simulate dawn breaking. Tap the field to assign a interval time (1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 30 minutes) and nature tone (Fairy fountain, Birdsong by the lake, Sparkling mist, The secret forest, Serenity, or Gentle spring rain).
Interval category describes the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications (snooze time).
Tone category provides one of several nature sounds that are used as the alarm tone. 7. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm. 8. Tap Save to store the new alarm event. Turning Off an Alarm To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and slide to any direction. Setting the Snooze Feature To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds, to any direction. Snooze must touch and slide first be set in the alarm settings. Deleting an Existing Alarm 1. From within the Clock application, touch and hold an on-screen alarm event. 2. Tap Delete. World Clock This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of world. 1. From within the Clock application, tap the World clock tab. 2. Tap Add city then scroll and select the desired city, or tap in the search field to locate a city. Applications and Widgets 163 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To assign DST settings:
1. Locate a desired city from the World clock list. 2. Touch and hold a city and select DST settings. 3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, or 1 hour). If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol displays next to the World Clock city listing. Stopwatch This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the stopwatch keep running. 1. From within the Clock application, tap Stopwatch tab. 2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter. 3. Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter. 4. Tap Stop to stop the counter. 5. Tap Restart to restart the lap counter. You can have multiple lap times. 6. Tap Reset to reset the counter. Setting a Timer 1. From within the Clock application, tap Timer tab. 2. Tap the Hours, Minutes, or Seconds field and use the on-screen keypad to enter the hour, minute, or seconds. The timer plays an alarm at the end of the countdown. 3. Tap Start to start the timer. 4. Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and start over. 5. Tap Restart to resume the timer counter. Configuring a Desk Clock This feature lets you activate an on-screen clock that can be viewed when the device is docked. 1. From within the Clock application, tap Desk clock tab. The default Desk clock displays. Note: You might have to scroll across the tabs to locate the Desk clock tab at the far right. 164 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 2. To make changes, press and then tap Settings.
Settings: provides access to the Desk clock settings menu The following options are displayed while in full-screen mode:
Calendar: when this is checked, the calendar displays. Tap to uncheck.
Weather: when this is activated, the location, temperature, and weather condition displays. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on.
Dock: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display, Automatic unlock, and Audio output. For more information, refer to Accessory on page 272 3. Tap 4. To make changes in full screen mode, press to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode. and then tap:
Edit shortcuts: allows you to edit the shortcuts shown at the bottom of full screen mode.
Hide/Show shortcuts: allows you to hide or view the current on-screen shortcuts located along the bottom of the full screen mode. from where you can alter the following: Hide status bar, Wallpaper, Calendar, Weather, and Dock.
Date and time: provides access to the Date and time menu. Contacts The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phones built-in memory. From the Home screen, tap Apps Contacts. For more information, refer to Contacts List on page 87 Downloads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files (Internet and Other). 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Downloads. 2. Place a check mark on an available file to select it. 3. Choose an available action such as Share, Delete, Sort by size/date, or Clear list. Applications and Widgets 165 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Dropbox Works to provide access to your desktop files directly from your device. This applications allows you to bring your files with you when you're on the go, edit files in your Dropbox from your device, upload photos and videos to Dropbox, and share your selected files freely with family and friends. The in-device application works in conjunction with a partner program placed on a target computer using an active Internet connection. Dropbox creates a folder that automatically synchronizes its contents across all of your connected devices on your account. Update a file to your Dropbox on your computer, and its automatically updated to the same folder on your other devices. Download the Desktop application 1. Use your computers browser to navigate to:
http://www.dropbox.com/. Important! The computer application must be installed on the computer containing the desired files. This computer must have an active Internet connection. 2. Follow the on-screen setup and installation instructions on your target computer containing the desired files. Note: It might be necessary to configure your routers firewall settings to allow this application to gain access to the Internet. Accessing Dropbox on your Device 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Dropbox Start. 2. Tap Sign in, enter your current account credentials, and tap Sign in. or Tap Sign up for Dropbox and follow the on-screen instructions to register for a new account. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. Initially, you will need to configure your Camera Upload parameters. Choose from Wi-Fi only or Wi-Fi or data plan.
Tap Turn on Camera Upload after making your selection. 166 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Caution! Enabling this feature can incur data charges
(depending on your plan) if the Wi-FI or data plan is selected. 5. Tap Access Dropbox at the top of the application window to access the files and folders you area currently sharing from your computer. 6. Tap an item to open it. 7. Tap the bottom of the image to reveal additional options:
Delete to erase the current file.
Add to Album to create a new album and add a series of images.
Share via applications such as: Copy link, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google, Google+, Hangouts, Memo, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.
More to choose from options such as:
Open with... to open the current file with the default in-device application. Export to transfer the current file to another location via:
Save to SD card, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Group Play, Hangouts, Messaging, Picasa, Share by Samsung UI, or Wi-Fi Direct. 8. Tap
(Up a Directory Level) at the top of the application window to navigate up a single level with every tap. 9. Tap
(Camera Uploads/Albums) at the top of the application window to access your Uploads and Albums tabs. 10. Tap
(Tag as Favorite) at the top of the application window to assign favorite files. Applications and Widgets 167 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Flipboard This application creates a personalized digital magazine out of everything being shared with you. Access news stories, personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account, photos from friends and much more. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Flipboard . 2. Swipe up on the Flipboard screen, then tap Flipboard Account at the top of the display. 3. Tap Create to set up a new Flipboard account. or Tap Sign In to log into your previously created profile. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Flipboard. Manually uploading a Picture to Dropbox 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Camera. 2. After the image is taken, tap the Image Viewer box at the bottom right. This previews the current image. 3. Tap the image to reveal the image options at the top of the screen. 4. Tap Add to Dropbox select a folder location and tap Upload. Note: If your share folder is located on your computer, you will momentarily receive an on-screen popup notifying you that a new image was uploaded to your shared Dropbox folder. Email Email enables you to review and create email using most email services. The device alerts you when you receive an email message. From the Home screen, tap Apps
(Email). For more information, refer to Using Email on page 123. 168 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as a picture message. From the Home screen, tap Apps Gallery. For more information, refer to The Gallery on page 157. Gmail Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail account on the Web. From the Home screen, tap Apps Gmail. For more information, refer to Using Google Mail on page 135. Google Use Google Search to search the Web. From the Home screen, tap Apps Google and enter the search text. or Tap information. on the Google Search bar and say the search Google Settings As Google has become more intertwined with other applications, this menu provides a quick and ready access point to configure preferences for Google+, Maps & Latitude, Location, etc.. You can also use the Search function to initiate a Google Search from this menu. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Google Settings and select an on-screen option. 2. Tap one of the following options: Apps with Google+
Sign in, Google+, Location, Maps & Latitude, Search, and Ads. 3. Follow the on-screen prompts. Applications and Widgets 169 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google+. From the Home screen, tap Apps Google+. For more information, refer to Google + on page 137. Group Play This application lets you share documents, photos or music in real-time with other connected friends. Note: Group play is not the same as Screen mirroring which requires a connection to a Wi-Fi capable Samsung TV or via the use of the AllShare Cast Hub. For more information, refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 158 Important! To share a Group Play, all users must be connected to the same Wi-Fi access point. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Group Play. 2. Read the on-screen information and tap Agree to continue. 3. Follow the on-screen tutorials. 170 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Creating a group If you have media you want to share, create a group for other users to join to and then share/collaborate with what you are sharing. The creator of the group is the leader and it the source of the shared file. All other joined members can then interact with the file being shared. 1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your other participants are also connected to this same Wi-Fi. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps Group Play. 3. Tap the Set group password field to enable the function which requires users to enter a password prior to connecting to your new group. 4. Tap Create group. If previously selected, enter your group password and tap OK. Mobile AP is enabled. 5. Tap one of the media items listed under the Share and play content heading. 6. Tap to select the items you want to share (indicated by a check mark), then tap Done or OK. 7. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their devices (see below) and they can view your media using you as a Mobile AP. Joining a group A joiner is the participant of an already created group. You can only view and interact with media shared by the leader of an existing group. 1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm your connection is this same Wi-Fi as the group leader. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps Group Play. 3. Tap Join group. Your device then scans for available groups for you to join. 4. Select a group to join. Once connected, you can then select the shared content and interact with your groups shared media. 5. Press and select Help for additional information. Applications and Widgets 171 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Hangouts Previously known as Google Talk, is an updated place to hangout, share photos, and even video calls. This is a free web-based application for instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. From the Home screen, tap Apps Hangouts. For more information, refer to Hangouts on page 137. Help Provides access to built-in Help information. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Help. 2. Select an on-screen topics for more information:
New features: provides help on all of the new features and applications such as Smart screen and Group Play.
Basics: provides basic information on using your device such as Keys, Lock screen, Notifications, Home screen, Keyboard, Phone, Messaging, and Update your device.
Settings: provides information on settings for Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Ringtone, Power saving mode, NFC, and Screen Mirroring.
Applications: provides information on how to use basic applications like Contacts, Email, Internet, Camera, etc. Accessing the Internet To access the Browser:
From the Home screen, tap Apps Internet. 172 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Local Local (formerly known as Google Places) displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business or person, find out more information about the business, see coupons, public responses, and more. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Local. 2. Tap
(Search) and then use the Search Maps field to manually enter a desired place or choose from among the various categories. Matches are filtered by those closest to your current location. Maps Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view real-time traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions. There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a specific address. You can view locations on a vector or aerial map, or you can view locations at the street level. Important! Before using Google Maps you must have an active data (3G/4G/LTE) or Wi-Fi connection. The Maps application does not cover every country or city. From the Home screen, tap Apps 3. Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants, Maps. Cafes, Bars, Attractions, [user added searches], RECOMMENDATIONS, or IN THIS AREA a list of places within this category displays. 4. Tap the Maps icon to launch the related maps feature. and then tap Add a search. The functions 5. Press adds additional search shortcuts to the places screen. Important! For best results, it is recommended that you enable all of your location services. For more information, refer to Location Services on page 289. Applications and Widgets 173 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Enabling a Location source Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable the location source you must enable the wireless network, or enable the GPS satellites. Important! The more location determining functions are enabled, the more accurate the determination is of your position. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location services. 2. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite. 3. Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data from sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location. 4. Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite locations. To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the following conditions:
inside a building or between buildings
in a tunnel or underground passage
in poor weather
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
in a vehicle with tinted windows Opening Maps 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Maps. 2. Tap the upper-right My location button to find your location on the map with a blinking blue dot. 3. Locate the bottom row of the buttons to access additional options:
Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.
Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a starting point. 174 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Local: provides access to the places menu where you can quickly locate a business or person, find out more information about a business, see coupons, public responses, and more
(Local). Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions, or select from available categories such as Entertainment, ATMs, Gas stations, Hotels, Post office, or Taxi.)
Layers: allows you to switch map views:
Traffic: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving. Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery available, most of which is approximately one to three years old. Terrain: combines a topographical view of the areas terrain with the current map location. Transit Lines: displays the overlapping transit lines on your map. Latitude: allows you to see your friend's locations and share your location with them. My Maps: displays a list of your preferred maps. Bicycling: displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map. Wikipedia: displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your map. 4. Press and select one of the following options:
Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map.
Make available offline: allows you to store map-related information locally on your device and access it even when the device is offline.
Settings: allows you to select the following additional options:
Display: allows you to enable/disable the Zoom Buttons, Scale Bar, and Bubble action. Offline and cache: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when not using Wi-Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles. Choose from: Automatic caching, Clear all map titles, or Clear My Places cache. Location settings: lets you access and configure the location settings. Sign in: allows you to sign into your current Google account. Applications and Widgets 175 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that arent ready for primetime. They may change, break or disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it. Whats New: provides access to the Play Store from where you can update the application manually. About: displays general information about Google maps such as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free memory, etc. Feedback: allows you to provide application feedback. Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy, or Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from the pop-up menu.
Help: provides help information. Messages This application allows you to use the Short Message Service
(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile phones. You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile phones. From the Home screen, tap Apps Messages. For more information, refer to Messages on page 109. Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation. When you get a new conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your device. From the Home screen, tap Apps Messenger. For more information, refer to Messenger on page 138. 176 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 3.36 MiB | / December 02 2014 |
Music This application allows you to play music files that you have stored on your microSD card. You can also create playlists. The Music Player is an application that can play music files. Launching the Music Player allows you to navigate through your music library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed). Playing Music 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Music. 2. Tap a library category tab to select the music category:
Songs, Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders. 3. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback. Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is connected through the headset jack only. 4. Use any of the following Music player controls:
Pause the song. Start the song after pausing. Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to previous song. Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go to next song. Volume control. Volume control showing volume muted. Plays the entire song list once. Replays the current list when the list ends. Repeats the currently playing song. Shuffles the current list of songs randomly. Songs play in order and are not shuffled. Applications and Widgets 177 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Lists the current playlist songs. Displays the current song in the player window. Assign the current song as a Favorite. Streams the current music file to another device via Samsung Link. Making a Song a Phone Ringtone 1. Tap the Songs tab. 2. Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the on-screen context menu. 3. Tap Set as Phone ringtone. 4. Choose a starting point for the ringtone to start playing from. Select either From the beginning or Auto recommendations (you can allow the application to choose the best part to start from). Note: Additional Set as options include Caller ringtone and Music Options The Music settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background, sound effects, and how the music menu displays. With the application displayed and playing a song, and select one of the following options:
press
Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth headset.
Play via Group Play: allows you to share music with others via the Group Play application. All users must be connected to the same Wi-Fi. For more information, refer to Group Play on page 170
Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a selected playlist.
Set as: allows you to set the current song as a Phone ringtone, Caller ringtone, or Alarm tone. Additionally you can either choose to start the selected song from the beginning or allow the application to automatically recommend a start point. Alarm tone. 178 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Scan for nearby devices: allows you to look for DLNA -
compliant devices used to control streaming media.
Settings: allows you to change your music player settings.
Details: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title, Album, Track length, Genre, Track number, Format, Size, and Location.
End: closes the application. Music Settings The settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background, sound effects, and how the music menu displays. 1. Press 2. Select one of the following settings:
Settings from within the music settings.
Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres, Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu.
SoundAlive: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop, Rock, Dance, Jazz, Classic, etc.
Adapt Sound: enable or disable the adaptive sound feature to adjust to the sound levels of your current environment.
Play speed: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and 2.0X using the slider.
Music auto off: when enabled, sets a timer for the Music application to automatically turn off after a pre-selected amount of time.
Lyrics: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if available.
Voice control: when activated, allows you to use voice control commands to control the music player. Applications and Widgets 179 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Using Playlists Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback. These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device, or using a third-party application (such as Windows Media Player) and downloading those files to an SD card inserted into the device. Creating a Playlist 1. Tap the Playlists tab. 2. Press 3. Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new and then tap Create playlist. name for this playlist, then tap OK. Adding Music to a Playlist 1. Tap the Playlists tab. 2. Tap the playlist name in which to add music. 3. Tap Add music. This option is available within user-created playlists. Note: If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song name from the main screen to open the context menu. Select Add to playlist and choose the playlist. 4. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music tracks to this playlist then tap Done. Removing Music from a Playlist 1. Tap the Playlists tab. 2. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music. 3. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context menu. 4. Tap Remove. Editing a Playlist Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can also share, delete, or rename the playlist. Note: Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default playlists can not be renamed. 1. Tap the Playlists tab. 2. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen context menu. 3. Tap Edit title. 4. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap OK. 180 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Transferring Music Files Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two methods:
1. Downloaded to the device from the Play Store. Music files are directly stored on your phone. 2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection. Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card. Removing Music Files 1. Tap the Songs tab. 2. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen context menu. 3. Tap Delete OK. The music file(s) is deleted. My Files This application allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if the associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4). From the Home screen, tap Apps My Files. Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders, subfolders, etc. Note: The application lets you view supported image files and text files on both your internal storage and microSD card. Applications and Widgets 181 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Opening and Navigating within Files DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device. These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location. To open files:
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps My Files. 2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your selected file.
Home tab
Up tab
Press allows you to back up to the root directory. allows you to back up into a higher directory. and then tap View by to change the way the files are displayed on-screen. Choose from: List, List and details, or Thumbnail.
Press for these additional options: Select all, Create folder, Search, View by, Sort by, and Settings. 182 To navigate:
1. Tap All files Device storage/SD memory card to see the contents of either device or your internal SD card. 2. The following folders may display:
ShareShot: displays the files shared via a group share shot session.
Alarms: this folder contains any alarm files you may have.
Android: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android applications.
Application: this folder contains app info for S Memo.
Bluetooth: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.
DCIM: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken by the device. Tap DCIM video files. Camera to view the picture or
Download: this folder contains downloads you have made.
Movies: this folder contains your Video and Movie files.
Music: this folder contains your Music files.
Notifications: this folder contains all of the notifications you have received.
Pictures: this folder contains your photos. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Podcasts: this folder contains all of your podcasts.
Ringtones: this folder contains any ringtones you have purchased. Navigation Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance. Note: Different folders may display depending on how your Caution! Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be phone is configured. wrong, dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries. 3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to launch the associated application. Important! To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the following conditions:
- inside a building or between buildings
- in a tunnel or underground passage
- in poor weather
- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
- in a vehicle with tinted windows 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Navigation. 2. Read the on-screen disclaimer regarding the current release status of the Navigation app and tap Accept. Applications and Widgets 183 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Enabling Location 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location services. 2. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite. 3. Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data from sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location. 4. Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite locations. Navigation options 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps
Type destination: allows you to manually enter a destination address (via the on-screen keypad).
Go home: allows you to return to a designated Home location. When prompted initially to setup a home address, enter the location into the Enter an address field and tap Save.
Map: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality. Navigation Map options Once on the map screen, you can access the following features:
Destination: returns you to the previous Navigation options Navigation. The navigation application can be screen. 2. configured from the main screen. If prompted, read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept. 3. Choose from the following on-screen options:
Driving/Walking/Bicycling
: tap to configure the method of travel. Selection of Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and obstructions.
Speak destination: allows you to use the voice recognition feature to search for matching locations in your area. 184
Search by voice: Speak your destination instead of typing.
Layers: allows you to switch map views:
Traffic view: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving.
Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery available, most of which is approximately one to three years old. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Parking: displays parking information relative to your current location.
Gas stations: displays gas station location relative to your current location. Phone This application provides the ability to make or answering calls, access the Contacts list, which is used to store contact information.
ATMs & banks: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to From the Home screen, tap Phone. your current location.
Restaurants: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to your current location. While on the map screen, press options:
Set destination: returns you to the navigation options screen to access additional where you can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or selecting from a Contacts entry or Starred Place.
Search: manually search for a destination address, place, name of business, or even a type of business.
Layers: allows you to switch map views. See previous description.
Settings: provides access to both Power settings (Screen dimming) and Information (Terms, privacy & notices).
Exit navigation: terminates the application.
Help: provides on-screen help. For more information, refer to Call Functions and Contacts List on page 54. Play Books Formerly known as Google Books, this application allows you to read over 3 million ebooks on the go. Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books: jump right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks. Personalize the reader to your liking, pick up reading where you left off on your phone or computer, and settle down with a great book on your Android phone!
Note: You must logged into your Google account prior to using this feature. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Play Books. Applications and Widgets 185 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 2. If prompted, tap Turn sync on. This synchronizes your books you have previously selected between your Books account and your device. 6. Tap a magazine to see more information and subscribe. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a 3. Tap to begin searching for both free and paid magazine. ebooks. 4. Follow the on-screen prompts to download the ebook to your device. Play Magazines With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them available to read on your device at any time or any place. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Play Magazines. 2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so. For more information, refer to Signing into Your Google Account on page 20 3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon to browse the full catalog. 4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept. 5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view Categories, Home, Top Selling, and New Arrivals. 186 Play Movies & TV This application allows you to connect to the Play Store, download a movie and then watch it instantly. Choose from thousands of movies, including new releases and HD titles in the Play Store and stream them instantly on your Android device. Movies, previously rented via the Play Store are automatically added to your My Movies library across your devices. Learn more about Google Play Movies at:
http://play.google.com/about/movies. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Play Movies & TV. 2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so. A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list. 3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and viewing movies. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. Tap the MOVIES tab to view movies you have rented. 5. Tap the TV SHOWS tab to view shows you have rented. 6. Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have on your device or memory card. Play Music Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop, and playback songs purchased from the Play Store. The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download. Access the new music tab from within your Play Store application. The Music application contains a music player that plays music and other audio files that you copy from your computer. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Play Music. The Music app searches both your online library and your devices internal storage for music and playlists;
this can take from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on the amount of new music added since you last opened the application. It then displays a carousel view of your new and recent music, organized by album. 2. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to link your current account to Google Play Music. Applications and Widgets 187 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 3. Tap an on-screen account to add it or select Add account to use a new account. 4. At the free songs screen, select either Get free songs or Skip.
Get free songs are downloaded via either the Internet or Play Changing Library View You can change the way you view the contents of your library. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Play Music. Store.
Follow the on-screen download and installation instructions. 5. Swipe left or right to browse through your new and available music. Music, albums, and artists are grouped into categories. 6. Tap an on-screen album to open it and begin playback. 7. Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the Music application by tapping the Music application icon top-left of the Application bar.
(Music notification icon) at the 2. While in a selection or screen, tap
(near the top-left of the Application bar) and then scroll left or right to access the various tabs. 3. Available tabs include: PLAYLISTS, RECENT, ARTISTS, ALBUMS, SONGS, or GENRES. Note: The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or list view, depending on the view. 188 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Searching for Music in Your Library 1. From within the Play Music application, tap Search to search through your available songs. 2. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist. Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box. 3. Tap a matching song to play it, tap a matching album, artist or playlist to view a list of its songs. Changing Music Settings From within the Play Music application, press and then make a selection.
Shuffle all: Play all songs in a random order.
Settings: Provides access to the Play Music settings.
Help: Displays application help information. Listening to Music You can listen to music by using your devices built-in speakers, through a wired headset, or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo headset. Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on the scale to set volume. Playing Music From within the Play Music application, tap a song in your library to listen to it. The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts to play. The tracks in the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list (unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise, playback stops only if you stop it, even when you switch applications. Note: If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the Music application, the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the screen. Applications and Widgets 189 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Displaying the Now Playing Screen If you navigate away from the Now playing screen, to return to the Now playing screen from other Music screens:
Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar. or In a single motion, touch and drag notification icon down from the Status bar and tap the song title from the Notifications area. You can also pause and resume playback and skip to the next song in the panel. For more information, refer to Notification Bar on page 38. Music Tab Options There are various options available from the various tabs:
From within the Play Music application, select one of to access an available the following tabs and tap option.
PLAYLISTS: Add to queue, Rename, Delete, or Keep on device.
RECENT: to display the most recently played songs and albums
ARTISTS: Add to queue, Add to playlist, or Shop for artist.
ALBUMS: Add to queue, Add to playlist, More by artist, or Shop for artist.
SONGS: Add to queue, Add to playlist, Shop for artist, or Delete.
GENRES: Add to queue, Add to playlist, More by artist, or Shop for artist. 190 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Options While Playing a Song When you play a song, the Now playing screen displays. There are various options and controls available while a song is playing:
1. From within the Play Music application, tap an album or song. 2. From the Now playing screen, press Menu to display the following options:
Equalizer: applies selected equalizer features such as:
FX booster, Bass boost, and 3D effect.
Clear queue: clears the current queue.
Save queue: stores the current queue.
Settings: Allows you to view and assign various music settings, and view different application-specific information.
Help: Provides an on-screen series of related help topics. 3. Tap Add to playlist to add the song to a playlist. or Tap a playlist. Add to playlist to add the song to The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you can tap to control the playback of songs, albums, and playlists:
Tap to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold to scan backward through the current song. Tap to resume playback. Tap to pause playback. Tap to advance to the next song. Touch and hold to scan forward through the current song. When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options, songs play in random order. When disabled
(as shown), songs play in the order they display in List view. Applications and Widgets 191 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options, songs play in random order. When enabled, songs play in random order. Tap to repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or disable repeat mode. Creating a Playlist 1. From within the Play Music application, tap an album or song list and play a song. 2. Tap adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist. 3. Tap New playlist Playlist name field to enter a name for the playlist. 4. Tap OK to save the new playlist. Adding Songs to Playlists 1. From within the Play Music application, tap an album or song list and play a song. 2. Tap adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist. 3. Select the desired target playlist. Playing a Playlist 1. From within the Play Music application, select the PLAYLISTS tab. 2. Tap next to a playlist title and tap Play. Deleting a Playlist 1. From within the Play Music application, display the PLAYLISTS library view. 2. Tap next to a playlist title and tap Delete. 192 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Shopping for Music at the Play Store To visit the Google PlayTM Store where you can find and buy music:
From within the Play Music application, tap Play Store in the Application Bar. The Google Play Store music section displays. Making Online Music Available Offline In addition to playing the music that you add to your online library, you can play music stored on your devices internal storage. Then you can listen to music when you have no Internet connection. To do this, make some of your online music available offline. Tip: You can also copy music directly from your computer to your device. To make your online music available offline on your device:
1. From within the Play Music application, change your library view to Albums, Artists, or playlists. 2. Tap the album or song entry you want to make indicates that the item available offline. A blue pin is already available offline. Darker pins display next to the items you can make available offline. A bar at the bottom of the screen shows how much space is available on your device for music and other files. Dim blue pins indicate songs or albums that you copied directly from a computer to your device. 3. Tap the dark pin next to each item you want to make available offline or tap a blue pin to stop making it available offline. You can switch to other views of your library to make other kinds of items available offline as well. 4. Tap Done in the bar at the bottom of the screen. 5. The Music application starts downloading the items to your device. Applications and Widgets 193 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Play Store Formerly known as the Android Market, this application provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your phone. The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone. Before using the Play Store, you must have a Google Account. Accessing the Play Store 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Play Store. 2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap Next. 3. Tap Existing and enter your Google account information. 4. Tap Accept to agree to the Play Store terms of service. Downloading a New Google Application To download a new application, you will need to use your Google account to sign in to the Play Store. The home page provides several ways to find applications. The home page features applications and includes a list of item applications by category, a list of games, a link to search, and a link to My apps. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Play Store. 2. Browse through the categories, find an application you're interested in, and tap the name. 3. Read the application descriptions. 194 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Important! If the selected application requires access to data or control of a function on your device, the Play Store displays the information the application will access. Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application. Once you tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this application on the device and the amount of data it uses. Use this feature with caution. 4. Tap Install ACCEPT. Note: Use caution with applications which request access to any personal data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage times. 5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for the application. 6. Check the progress of the current download by opening the Notifications panel. The content download appears in the notification area of the status icon bar. 7. On the main Play Store screen, press and then tap My Apps, tap an installed application in the list, and then tap Open. Tip: The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list, or at the end of the list if View type is set to Customizable grid. Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please contact your service provider for further details. Applications and Widgets 195 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Launching an Installed Google Application 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is Apps. typically located on the last Applications page. Unknown sources This feature can be used for Android application development. The feature allows developers to install non-Play Store applications. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security Unknown sources. Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is active. Note: If Unknown sources is disabled, those applications without a certificate will not be allowed to download to your device. 196 Manage applications This feature allows you to manage and remove installed applications. You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your device and clear the data, cache, or defaults. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Application manager. Clearing application cache and data 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Application manager. 2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data. 3. Tap Force stop, Uninstall, Clear data, Clear cache, or Clear defaults. Uninstalling third-party applications You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed from the Play Store. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Application manager Downloaded. 2. Tap the third-party application, and from the Application info screen, tap Uninstall. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential POLARIS Office 5 POLARIS Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible office suite. This application provides a central place for managing your documents online or offline. The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format) files. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps POLARIS Office 5. 2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch Register to complete the process. or Touch Skip to ignore this registration. The main POLARIS Office 5 screen displays. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use POLARIS Office 5. S Memo The S Memo application allows you to create memos using the keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice recordings, and text all in one place. Creating a New Memo 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps S Memo. 2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to enter edit mode. or Tap keypad displayed or tap drawing mode using your finger or a compatible on-screen writing tool. You can change back and forth in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen. to start a new memo in text mode with the to start a new memo in Applications and Widgets 197 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Toolbar Show/Hide Secondary Toolbar Writing area Add Page Keyboard Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings. Undo the last action. Redo the last action that was undone. Make a voice recording to add to the memo. This option is not available in free-format drawing mode. Hide the secondary toolbar. Show the secondary toolbar. Provides access to a quick selection bar. Choose from:
Take picture, Images, Clipboard, Maps, and Clip art. These elements can be used within the memo. The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described in the following table:
Add an additional page to the memo. 3. Press to access the following options:
Changes the view mode. Allows you to add free-format drawing. Displays the keypad to you can add text. 198 Note: Depending on whether you have saved the memo, are in keypad mode, or in handwriting mode, the options will display differently. The following is a list of the options you may see. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Share via: allows you to share your memo as either an Image file (.jpg), a PDF file (.pdf), Plain text, or S Memo file (.snb) via Group Play, Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, ChatON, Flipboard, Picasa, Google+, Messaging, AT&T Locker, Gmail, or Email.
Delete: allows you to delete the S Memo.
Export: allows you to save the memo to your Gallery as either a JPG or as a PDF.
Save as: allows you to save the memo with a different name.
Add tag: allows you to set tags to add in searches.
Add to Favorites: allows you to tag the current memo as a favorite.
Change background: allows you to set the background for your memo. Tap the background that you want, then tap
.
Create event: allows you to link the memo to your Calendar events.
Set as: allows you to set a memo as a contact icon, Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.
Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi. S Translator Allows you can easily translate words and phrases (verbal or text messages) into many different languages. Note: Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application. For more information, refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps S Translator. 2. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to log into your Samsung account. To translate text:
1. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar to select your target/source language. Default is Spanish. 2. Tap the bottom language bar to select the destination language that you would like to translate to. Default is English (US). 3. Enter text into the top box and it will automatically be 4. Tap Save on the top menu bar when you are finished translated into the lower box. creating your memo. Applications and Widgets 199 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. Tap the selected
(Translate) button within the bottom field. The top target language field is then updated with the new translation. To translate using your voice:
Important! The two on-screen buttons at the bottom of the application correspond to the two currently selected languages. 1. At the S Translator screen, tap the left voice button to verbally speak the selected language (corresponds to top field). 2. Wait a few seconds until the on-screen notification shows Speak in... then speak using the selected language. 3. Within a few seconds, confirm the translated text now appears in the other translation field. 4. Tap the selected
(Speak) button to translate using your selected input language and voice.
Example, if trying to speak in English and get a Spanish translation, tap the Speak (English (US)) button and wait for the text to display on-screen. 5. Press for additional options. Choose from: History, Favorite, Preset phrases, TTS speech rate, and Help S Voice Launches your phones built-in voice recognition system that allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the phone. Features include: Call, Text, Navigate, Play music, Memo, and Driving mode. From the Home screen, tap Apps S Voice. For more information, refer to Using S Voice on page 72 200 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Samsung Apps Allows you to easily download an abundance of applications that are directly compatible with your device. This includes games, news, reference, social networking, navigation, and more. Samsung Apps makes your Smartphone smarter. Note: Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application. For more information, refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 Samsung Hub Samsung Hub makes it easy to find, sample, and purchase movies, TV shows, books, games, and music, in one user-
friendly location. With hundreds of titles available, entertaining your family on-the-go has never been easier. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from any location. Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile entertainment. You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase and rent content via Samsung Hub. 1. Confirm you are currently signed into your Samsung Note: Samsung Hub usage is based on service availability. account. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps Samsung Apps. 3. If prompted, read the Disclaimer, Terms and conditions, and Privacy policy and tap Accept. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Important! You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G/LTE connection to preview and download a media file. The internal memory acts as a storage location for your downloaded rental or purchase. Important! The Samsung account manages the access information (username/password) to several applications, such as Samsung Link, Chat On, and Samsung Hub. Applications and Widgets 201 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Creating a New Samsung Hub Account Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an account. Enter the required information. Note: Your Samsung Hub account is managed by the Samsung account application. This application manages your user profile information. 1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps Samsung Hub . 3. When prompted to connect via mobile networks, select 4. either Cancel or Connect. If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or verified, tap OK. You must be signed in to your Samsung account to use the applications various features. Tip: In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your and Samsung account via the application. Press then select Sign in. 202 5. Press Help for additional information. Using Samsung Hub The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all the available categories on one page such as: Music, Video, Books, and Games. The overview page also displays recently added media that you can rent or purchase. Apps 1. From the Home screen, tap Samsung Hub.
The Overview screen (landing page) displays an main access for all available categories and recently available content for purchase or rental. 2. Scroll across the screen to select from the following available pages:
MUSIC: displays featured Music content available for purchase/
stream from the Music store & Radio. This page also allows you to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Music store page by clicking on the Music link at the top of the page.
VIDEO: displays featured film and TV content available for purchase/rent from the video store. This page also allows you to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Movie &
TV store page by clicking the Video link at the top of the page. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential BOOKS: displays featured Book content available for purchase from the Book store. This page also allows you to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Book store page by clicking the Books link at the top of the page.
GAMES: displays featured Game content available from the Game store. This page also allows you to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking the Games link a the top of the page. 3. To purchase or view featured content in more detail, tap on any content (Thumbnail or text) to navigate to the product detail page. 4. Depending on the content, you can either purchase, rent, or stream the content directly from the product detail page. 5. Choose a payment method, then follow the on-screen instructions. Samsung Hub Notices
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after you create an account in Samsung Hub.
Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Samsung Hub (or the service) that are also registered to the same account.
You may remove a device from your account no more than once every 90 days.
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as youd like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content later subject to content re-download availability and content provider permissions.
You may need network coverage to access Media Content you have acquired through the Service.
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity to download Media Content.
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content is viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time.
Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized device's SD card. No SD Card included out of box. Applications and Widgets 203 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks where there is a weak signal.
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a) license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media Content has been buffered.
You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set out for each piece of content (which may be as short as 24 consecutive hours).
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not extend the available viewing time.
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).
Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers, you can download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections;
otherwise, you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your mobile device output. 204 Samsung Link This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung device with your TV, streams content, and even keeps tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen monitoring. Samsung Link makes staying connected easy. Samsung Link allows users to share their in-device media content with other external devices using DLNA certified
(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer. Important! You must first connect both of your communicating devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an active/registered Samsung account prior to using this application. For more information, refer to Wi-
Fi Settings on page 119 For more information, refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 14 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Samsung Link. 2. Tap Sign in to sign into your Samsung Account if you have not already done so. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 3. If prompted, read the on-screen message about network charges and tap OK to continue and return to the main Samsung Link screen. 4. Tap Start and follow the on-screen prompts. 5. Scroll across the application screen to view either MY RECENT CONTENT or DEVICES & STORAGE. 6. The DEVICES & STORAGE screen contains two separate streaming media options:
Registered storage: allows you to receive and playback media stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming content.
Registered devices: allows you to stream/share selected multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device connected to the same Wireless Access Point. Configuring Samsung Link Settings Samsung Link must first be configured prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-Fi, Items to share, source server address, and external device acceptance rights. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Samsung Link DEVICES & STORAGE tab. 2. Press and then tap Settings and configure the following settings as desired:
Registered storage: allows you to add a Web storage location. Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able to use Samsung Link.
My device: displays your device name as it is used with Samsung Link. Tap to change the device name.
Save to: allows you to save your media to your internal phone memory or to an SD card.
Auto upload: allows you to enable automatic upload of images from your device to those storage locations specified within the Web storage list. Slide the slider to the right to turn it on.
Video optimization: allows you to setup the video quality for streamed video content. Side the slider to the right to turn it on. Applications and Widgets 205 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Password lock: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link 3. Tap your device name from the Registered devices by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated Samsung account password. Slide the slider to the right to turn it on.
My account: displays Samsung account information.
Customer support: allows you to contact the Samsung Link team via a new email from an available email account.
About this service: displays application information Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target Device Important! Make sure all communicating devices are connected to the same Wi-Fi. 1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target device (such as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.). area. 4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies, Files, or Info) and select a file.
A file with in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your device to access the file currently stored on your services servers. 5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to place a green check mark alongside it. 6. Tap
(Stream to connected devices) and select an available target device to begin streaming. 7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the on-screen Allow button to continue. Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps media with the external source. Samsung Link. Note: You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before you can use this feature. 206 8. Confirm
(Samsung Link Controller enabled) appears in the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate you are using your device as the media source. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Settings This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone. From the Home screen, tap Apps Settings. or From the Home screen press Settings. and then tap For more information, refer to Changing Your Settings on page 233. Story Album With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your story in media. Special moments display on a timeline, and if you wish, you can have your album published as a hard copy. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Story Album
. 2. Read the introductory information and tap Next. 3. Tap Start to begin your Story Album. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Press Help for additional information. TripAdvisor With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and have your perfect trip. With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers, it is easy to find the best hotels, restaurants, and fun things to do. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps TripAdvisor
. 2. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not already done so. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use TripAdvisor. 4. Press for additional options. Applications and Widgets 207 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Video The Video application plays video files stored on the SD card. This device is able to playback DivX videos. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Video. A list of available videos displays in the Video list. 2. Tap a video file to begin viewing. Sharing Videos 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Video. After a few seconds, each on-screen video begins to cycle through a preview of the first five seconds of the clip. and then tap Share via. 2. Press 3. Select either individual videos or tap Select all. 4. Click Done to complete the process or Cancel to quit. 5. Select a sharing option. Choose from: Add to Dropbox, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Picassa, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube. 208 Voice Recorder The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately share it using Wi-Fi Direct, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time will vary based on the available memory within the phone. Voice 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Recorder. 2. To start recording, tap Record and speak into the microphone. 3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop to to stop and save the recording or Pause temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap Record to resume recording. Once the audio recording has stopped, the message is automatically saved. Tap Cancel without saving. to cancel the recording 4. Tap List to display a list of all your voice recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it. 5. Press to display the following options:
Share via: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap the recordings to delete and tap Delete.
Settings: the following settings are available:
Storage: allows you to choose where your recordings are saved. Select between Phone or memory card. Recording quality: allows you to set the recording quality to High or Normal. Limit for MMS: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for MMS by selecting On, you are assured that the recording can be sent in a message. Contextual filename: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to adjust the filename based on contextual information such as your current GPS location. Default name: allows you to choose the name prefix for your recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003, etc. Noise reduction: allows you to activate/deactivate background noise suppression. Recording volume: allows you to assign the ambient noise quality of your current location so the device can better detect audio. Choose from High or Low. Channel: allows you to assign recording mode to either Mono or Stereo. Skip interval: allows you to assign a skip length.
End: allows you to close the application. Voice Search The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the web using only your voice. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Voice Search. 2. When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak the word or words that you would like to search for on the internet. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words that you would like to search for on the internet. Results are displayed on your phone. 3. Applications and Widgets 209 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential WatchON With the WatchON application, you can use your phone as a remote control for your TV. Important! Before initiating use, verify you have an active Internet connection available (either mobile network or Wi-Fi connection). Note: Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup, confirm your TV is turned off. 4. The following options are available at the bottom of your screen:
Web: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the original search results.
Images: Displays images for your search.
Places: Displays places and businesses in your local area pertaining to your search.
MORE: After tapping MORE, sweep your screen to the left to see additional options such as News, Shopping, Videos, Blogs, Discussions, and Books.
Phone: Displays a phone number if applicable. VPN Client VPN Client lets you define multiple Virtual Private Networks
(VPNs) to your device and connect to them as needed by simply selecting a connection from the VPN Client list. From the Home screen, tap Client. Apps VPN 210 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Initial Configuration 1. Sign into your Samsung account. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps WatchON. Note: If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile network. Click Connect to proceed. 3. Select your desired country for your TV Guides source listing and tap Next. 4. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code must correspond to the location of your desired TV and set top box. 5. From the Find your TV service screen, select a service provider from the available channel listing. 6. From the Choose your TV Brand screen, tap your TVs manufacturer name.
If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector, select from one of the following two options. Choose from either Other TV Brands or I Have a Projector. 7. Aim your device at the TV and tap
(Power) to confirm the set up process completed successfully and the correct TV IR codes were selected. Note: The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10 seconds. Please do not press the button again. 8. If the TV turned on, tap Yes. or If the TV did not turn on after tapping waiting 10 seconds, tap No or Retry.
(Power) and 9. From the Choose Your TV Tuner screen, select the entry that corresponds to your current channel control method:
Cable/Satellite/STB/PVR/DVR: selected when changing channels is done via a receiver box. Channels are not changed via the TV remote but rather through the receiver/box.
My xxx TV: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV and no box is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by using the TV remote and not a boxs remote. Note: Try matching your current channel selection method. Applications and Widgets 211 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 10. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list. For example, DirectTV.
If your brand does not display in the list, tap Other Satellite Box Brands and follow the on-screen instructions. Important! You must configure your set top box for IR communication with your device. If you do not select More Info.. below and follow the on-screen instructions you may not be able to properly use the application. 11. When prompted to Enable IR, tap More Info.. to learn how to configure your set top box to receive and respond to IR controls. 12. Only after completing the IR setup process and programming your box, press
. Note: This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time process and once successful should not need to be repeated. 13. If prompted to personalize your experience, follow the on-screen instructions. 212 Using WatchON To change channels:
1. Sign into your Samsung account. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps WatchON. 3. From the top of the main screen, tap
(Remote Control). This launches an on-screen set of remote control tabs. Choose from one of the following:
Easy remote: provides the most common used control features. Scroll down to view additional functions.
[Set top box]: displays customized control specific to your configured set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control functions.
TV: provides access to control functions specific to your TV. 4. From the top of the main screen tap
(Select Room) to choose from different receivers/boxes in different rooms. (Example: Living Room box, Bedroom box, etc.). 5. Press to return to the main menu. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Locating your favorite programming:
1. Sign into your Samsung account. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps WatchON. 3. From the main screen Tap
(Combined View) to reveal available media categories. 4. Select an available category. or Tap Guide to display on your TV an on-screen listing of available set top box shows. For additional information on the WatchON application, press and then select Help. WatchOn Settings 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps WatchON . and then select an available on-screen 2. Press option:
Change Room: allows you to select a previously configured room.
Settings: provides access to the Samsung WatchOn settings menu.
Help: displays on-screen help information.
About: displays on-screen information about the application. Applications and Widgets 213 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Personalize WatchON You can personalize your application to do things such as show content only from your selected media categories, or add an additional rooms set top box. To configure your Just for you settings:
The Just for you option displays available content matching your activated media categories. These categories can be configured during your initial set up or at any later time. 1. Sign into your Samsung account. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps WatchON. 3. From the main screen Tap
(Combined View) Just for you. 4. From the On TV tab, press and then select Settings. 5. Access parameters such as Basic info, Genres and Sports to then configure and enable those parameters you would like to show in the Just for you tab. To add a new room:
Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from several rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do the same. 1. Sign into your Samsung account. 2. From the Home screen, tap Apps WatchON. 3. From the On TV tab, press and then select Settings Add room. 4. Name the new room and tap Next. 5. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code must correspond to the location of your desired TV and set top box. 6. Follow steps 4-10 starting on page 211 to complete the process. 214 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide variety of user-generated video content, including movie clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content such as video blogging, informational shorts and other original videos. Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional data charges. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. At the You Tube introduction screen, tap OK. 3. Tap the search field to search for specific videos, YouTube. scroll down to browse through the main page thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional options. 4. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or tap the title link. Applications and Widgets 215 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 9: Connections Your device is equipped with features that allow you to quickly connect to the Web. Wi-Fi About Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured
(requiring knowledge of the Router name and password). Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi Calling feature is automatically enabled. _____________________________________ For additional information on WPS Connections, refer to WPS Push Button on page 237 and WPS PIN Entry on page 237. 216 Activating Wi-Fi By default, your devices Wi-Fi feature is turned off
(deactivated). Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points). 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap 2. Connections tab. Settings In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the right to turn it on. The device scans for available in-range wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks on the same screen. Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Wi-Fi. Settings Connections tab The network names and security settings (Open network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in the Wi-Fi networks section. 2. Tap the network in which to connect. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Note: When you select an open network the device automatically connects. 3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary). 4. Tap Connect. Wi-Fi Status Indicators The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP). Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network. Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode. Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and communicating Displays when Wi-Fi is used as a Mobile HotSpot feature, and is active and communicating. Manually Add a New Network Connection 1. From the Wi-Fi network screen, tap Add Wi-Fi network. 2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access Point). 3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This must match the current security setting on your target WAP. 4. Enter your WAPs password if the WAP is secure. 5. Tap Connect to store the new information and connect to the target WAP. Note: No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network. The WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default settings. Connections 217 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Deactivating Wi-Fi 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Connections tab. 2. Touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the left to turn it off. or Activate and Deactivate Wi-Fi from the Notification bar. Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth can reduce battery life and use times. Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Connections tab Wi-Fi. 2. Touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the right to turn it on. 3. Tap Scan. Wi-Fi Advanced Settings The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of the devices Wi-Fi services, including:
Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy
Viewing the devices MAC Address
Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Connections tab Wi-Fi. 2. Press and then tap Advanced. Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet. 218 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap 2. Connections tab. Settings In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status. When active, displays in the Status area. To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap 2. Settings Connections tab. In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off. Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use. Bluetooth Status Indicators The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance:
Displays when Bluetooth is active. Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and communicating. Connections 219 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the characteristics of your devices Bluetooth service, including:
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth communication and description
Setting your devices visibility (or discoverability) for other Bluetooth devices
Displaying your devices Bluetooth address To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Connections tab Bluetooth. 2. Verify Bluetooth is active (indicated by 3. Press and tap the Visibility timeout, Received files, ONON
). and Help fields to set the options. 220 To change your Bluetooth name:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active. 2. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings More tab About device. 3. Tap the Device name field and use the on-screen keyboard to edit the current device name. 4. Tap to erase the current device name and enter a new name for this device using the keyboard. 5. Tap OK to confirm your setting. To set visibility:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active. 2. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, toggle the state of the visibility check mark. Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate. Note: Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible time-out field (2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Visibility timeout. Never timeout). Press This value displays as a countdown within this Visibility timeout field.
(Menu) By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active. 2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers. To review your Bluetooth received files:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active. 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, press tap Received files. and then Pairing Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your device and another Bluetooth device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process. Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process. Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode. To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active. 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the Visibility field
(shown by the device name). Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an external device. This is shown by a green check mark. 3. Tap Scan. Your device displays a list of discovered in-
range Bluetooth devices. 4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing. 5. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK. Connections 221 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 6. The external device must accept the connection and enter your devices PIN code. Once successfully paired to an external device, displays in the Status area. Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth-
compatible devices. Important! If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired Bluetooth headset (with built-in microphone), verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entrys Bluetooth Settings page. Configuring Bluetooth Device Settings Some connected Bluetooth devices are capable of more than just functioning as a headphone, but also have built in microphones for picking up voice. Although both functions are detected by the device and activated, there might be times when you need to change or update these settings for Phone and Media Audio:
I can hear the other person but they cant hear me...
I want to use my Bluetooth device only as a headphone 1. Verify Bluetooth is active. Settings. 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap 3. Toggle the Call audio field to activate/de-activate the Bluetooth devices on-board microphone. 4. Toggle the Media audio field to activate/de-activate the Bluetooth devices headset functions. Note: If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired Bluetooth headset (with built-in microphone), verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entrys Bluetooth Settings page. 222 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the connection information again. 1. Verify your Bluetooth is active. 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously paired device (from the bottom of the page). 3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection. Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off. Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device Deleting a device from your list removes its connection record and upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the previous pairing information. Sending Contacts via Bluetooth Depending on your paired devices settings and capabilities, you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items using a Bluetooth connection. Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your phone and the external device, and the recipients device must be visible. 1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible. 2. From the Home screen, tap 3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the Contacts. on-screen context menu. 4. Tap Share namecard via Bluetooth and select a paired external Bluetooth device. Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for the pairing to be successful. 1. Verify Bluetooth is active. 2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Unpair to delete the paired device. Settings 5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list. Connections 223 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential PC Connections You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable using various USB connection modes. Media device (MTP): allows you to transfer media files in Windows, or using an Android file transfer on a Mac. Camera (PTP): allows you to transfer photos using the camera software, and transfer any files onto a PC that does not support MTP. Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your devices. Note: To sync your device to your computer it is highly recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is available at http://www.samsung.com/kies (for Windows/
Mac). Enable Downloading for Web Applications Important! Before you can download a web application you must insert an SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). For more information, refer to Installing the microSD Memory Card on page 11. 1. From the Home screen, press More tab Settings Unknown sources check box. and then tap Security 2. Tap OK to allow install of non-Play Store applications. Tap again to remove the check mark and disable the installation of non-Play Store applications. Warning! Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to protect your phone and data, use the Play Store to install web applications. For more information, refer to Downloading a New Google Application on page 209. 224 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential USB Tethering This option allows you to share your devices mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your device and a single computer. The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices. Note: You can not mount your devices microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/
downloads. Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. Connecting as a Storage Device You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the device, you can also access the files directory from the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader. Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk, separate from the internal memory. 1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up window displays on the PC when connected. 2. Open the folder to view files. 3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card. Connections 225 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To connect using USB Tethering:
To disconnect tethering:
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Mobile HotSpot. Mobile HotSpot. or From the Home screen, press Settings Tethering and Mobile HotSpot. and then tap Connections tab More networks 2. Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your device. 3. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places a green check mark next to the entry and activates the feature. A Tethering or HotSpot active notification briefly displays on the screen. Look for the Tethering active icon bar area of the screen. in the Status 4. Read the on-screen notification regarding data use and tap OK. 226 2. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the check mark and deactivate the feature. 3. Remove the USB cable from the device. Mobile HotSpot This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi-Fi hotspot. The feature works best when used in conjunction with 4G/LTE data services (although 3G service can also be used). The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices. Important! The Mobile HotSpot service cannot be active when the device is connected to Wi-Fi. Please disconnect your Wi-Fi connection prior to active this service. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To activate the Mobile HotSpot service:
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Mobile HotSpot. or From the Home screen, press Settings Tethering and Mobile HotSpot. and then tap Connections tab More networks Note: You must have a tethering plan on your account in order to use the Mobile HotSpot. You cannot use data on the device while using Mobile HotSpot. 2. In a single motion touch and slide the Mobile HotSpot slider to the right to turn it on. 3. Read the on-screen notification regarding data use and tap OK. 4. Edit the Network SSID name and then write it down. 5. Enable the Broadcast network name (SSID) field if you would like to broadcast your SSID name to nearby devices. 6. Verify the Security field is set to WPA2 PSK. Note: By default, the connection is not secured. 7. Enter a new password then write it down. Additional options include SHow password and Show advanced options. 8. Tap Save to store the new settings. 9. Confirm the Mobile HotSpot active icon displays at the top of the screen. Note: Using your Mobile HotSpot drains your devices battery much faster. The best way to keep using the device as a HotSpot is by connecting to a Charger. Connections 227 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential To connect to the HotSpot:
1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target device (laptop, media device, etc.). 2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the external device and select your devices Mobile HotSpot name from the network list.
The SSID name for your devices hotspot is determined by what you entered into the Network SSID field.
You can change the name by tapping Configure Network SSID and changing the entry. 3. Select this HotSpot and follow your on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet connection. To change the Portable HotSpot password:
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Mobile HotSpot. 2. Tap Mobile HotSpot 3. Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK. 4. With security enabled, delete the previous password Configure. and enter a new one into the Password field. 228 Important! The more complex the password, the harder it is for intruders to break your security. It is recommended that you not use names, birthdays, or other personal information. 5. Tap Save to store the new settings. To mange connected devices:
This feature allows you to provide MAC filtering on your device. This is similar to a VIP list where only device on the list are allowed access. 1. From the Home screen, tap
(Apps) Mobile HotSpot. 2. Tap Mobile HotSpot 3. Tap Allowed devices.
(Add new device) to add devices to the allowed for connection list. 4. Enter the Device name and Mac address. 5. Tap OK to save the new device. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 10: Settings This section explains the device settings for your device. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any extra settings associated with your device. Accessing Settings Settings Tabs Your phones Settings are divided into four main groups. When the Settings screen displays, the following four tabs display at the top of the screen:
From the Home screen, touch or From the Home screen, touch Settings. Menu Settings. Apps or Pull down the Notifications screen, then touch Settings. The Settings menu displays. Note: This section does not include information about Call settings. (For Call settings information, see Call Settings on page 252.) My device My device Connections: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data usage, More networks, NFC, S Beam, Nearby devices, Screen Mirroring, and Kies via Wi-Fi. My device: Lock screen, Display, Sound, Home screen mode, Call, Blocking mode, Driving mode, Power saving mode, Accessory, Accessibility, Language and input, Motions and gestures, Smart screen, and Voice control. Accounts: My accounts [Add account (Samsung account, ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Google, LDAP, Microsoft Exchangec Activesync, and Sync apps with Facebook)] and Backup options (Cloud and Backup and reset). More: Location services, Security, Application manager, Battery, Storage, Date and time, and About device. Settings 229 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Network Notification By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi network. You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab Wi-Fi. and then tap Advanced. 2. Press 3. Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Network notification is active. 4. Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark and deactivate this feature. Wi-Fi Settings This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. Activating Wi-Fi 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Connections tab. 2. Touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the right to turn it on ONON
. The device scans for available in-range wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks on the same screen. Wi-Fi settings Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your device automatically uses Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile services. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Conections tab Wi-Fi. 2. Press and then tap Advanced. Configure the settings as desired. The available Wi-Fi connections display with a security type displayed next to them. 230 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Wi-Fi During Sleep By default, when your device enter a sleep mode, your Wi-Fi connection stays on all the time. If the feature is Never enabled during sleep that current data usage is taken over by your SIM and its network connection. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab Wi-Fi. 2. Press and then tap Advanced Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep. 3. Select an available option:
Always: maintains your current active Wi-Fi connection even during sleep.
Only when plugged in: maintains the active Wi-Fi connection only when the device detects it is connected to a power supply. This reduced the drain on your devices battery.
Never (increases data usage): shuts off the current Wi-Fi connection during sleep and diverts any current data usage to the cellular network connection. Check for Internet Service Allows you to check for Wi-Fi Internet access once connected to a WAP (Wireless Access Point). 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab Wi-Fi. and then tap Advanced. 2. Press 3. Tap the Check for Internet service field to activate the feature. A green check mark indicates the feature is active. Finding your WI-Fi Address Information 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab Wi-Fi. 2. Press 3. Locate the MAC Address and IP Address information at and then tap Advanced. the bottom of the screen.
MAC address: view your devices MAC address, required when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
IP address: view your devices IP address. Settings 231 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab Wi-Fi Add Wi-Fi network. 2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access Point). 3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This must match the current security setting on your target WAP (Wireless Access Point). 4. Enter your WAPs password if the WAP is secure. 5. Touch Show advanced options and set any options (if required). 6. Tap Connect to store the new information and connect to the target WAP. WPS Push Button The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) feature (sometimes associated with a physical or on-screen button on most WAPs) allows you to pair your device and WAP without the need for entering a passcode. This process is similar to Wi-Fi Direct pairing. In this case, once the WPS feature is active on your WAP, your device can then detect it and then immediately pair to it. Note: WPS-capable routers display in the Wi-Fi list of available devices with the term (WPS available) below their name. To pair your device using WPS:
1. Follow the WPS activation instructions specific to your Wireless Access Point. Note: An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. 2. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab Its purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN whether accidentally or intentionally. To communicate, wireless devices must be configured with the same SSID. Wi-Fi. 3. Press 4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external then tap WPS push button. router now displays in the Wi-Fi list as connected. 232 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential WPS PIN Entry If a WPS Push Button does not work, there is an alternative WPS connection method where you would use a device generated PIN number to establish the connection. This number is then entered into your WAPs WPS client PIN field to complete the connection. To pair your device using WPS PIN:
1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab Wi-Fi. 2. Press 3. Write down the generate PIN number and enter it into then tap WPS PIN entry. your Wi-Fi Routers client PIN field. Wi-Fi Direct Setup and Settings You can configure your device to connect directly with other Wi-Fi capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data between devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi direct communication. This connection is direct and not via a HotSpot or WAP. Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode. Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and communicating. 4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external Note: Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi router now displays in the Wi-Fi list as connected. network connection. Settings 233 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 5. Tap Done. The direct connection is then established. Confirm displays in the Status bar. 6. When prompted to complete the connection, the recipient should tap OK. Your status field now reads Connected and your connected device is listed within the Wi-Fi Direct devices listing. To activate your connection:
1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the 2. right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status. 3. Tap Wi-Fi Direct. 4. Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin the connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device. or Tap Multi-connect names to begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi Direct compatible devices. Scan and select all the device Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and running before it can be detected by your device. 234 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Bluetooth In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with which to pair. For more information, refer to Bluetooth on page 220. Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Changing the Device Name 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings More tab About device. 2. Tap the Device name field and use the on-screen keyboard to edit the current device name. 3. Tap to erase the current device name and enter a new name for this device using the keyboard. 4. Tap OK to confirm your setting. 2. Connections tab. Settings In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status. When active, displays in the Status area. Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use. To turn Bluetooth off:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap 2. Settings. In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off. Settings 235 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and tap OK. Data Usage Monitor and mange your devices data usage capabilities. Features include activation/deactivation or network data usage, set mobile data usage for a set period of time, and view application data usage. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Connections tab Data usage. More Networks This tab displays additional wireless and network information. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Connections tab More networks. Activating Visibility 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab Bluetooth. 2. Verify your Bluetooth is active. 3. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, touch the check box next to your device name. Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate. Scanning for Devices This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you can pair with them. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab Bluetooth. 2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth-
compatible devices such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers. Important! Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to confirm and pair with them. 236 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Airplane Mode This mode allows you to use many of your devices features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited. Important! When your device is in Airplane mode, it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information or applications. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab More networks. 2. Touch the Airplane mode check box to turn it on. 3. Tap OK. The Airplane mode icon displays at the top of your screen. Tethering and portable hotspot This option allows you to share your phoness mobile data connection using a USB connection or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. USB Tethering This option allows you to share your devices mobile data connection using a direct USB connection between your device and a computer. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab More networks Tethering and portable hotspot. 2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable. 3. Tap USB tethering to turn on this feature. The USB displays. tethering icon Bluetooth Tethering Before starting, pair your computer with your device, then configure your computer to obtain its network connection via Bluetooth. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab More networks Tethering and portable hotspot. 2. Connect the other device to your device using a USB cable. 3. Tap Bluetooth tethering to turn it On. Important! Tethering consumes battery power and increases your data usage. Settings 237 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential VPN The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). 1. Set up a screen unlock PIN or password. For more information, refer to Setting an Unlock Pattern on page 244. 2. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab More networks VPN. Adding a VPN Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to use: PPTP, L2TP/IPSec PSK, L2TP/IPSec RSA, IPSec Xauth PSK, IPSec Xauth RSA, IPSec Hybrid RSA. Important! You must establish and configure a VPN before you can use it. 1. Set up a screen unlock PIN or password. For more information, refer to Setting an Unlock Pattern on page 244. 2. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab More networks VPN. 3. Tap Add VPN network. 238 4. In the form that displays, fill in the information provided by your network administrator. 5. Tap Save. Note: Similar setup process can be used for all available VPN types. Connecting to a VPN 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab More networks VPN. 2. Tap the VPN entry in which to connect. 3. Enter any requested credentials into the pop-up that displays. 4. Tap Connect. Edit a VPN 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab More networks VPN. 2. Touch and hold the VPN to edit. 3. Select Edit network from the pop-up that displays. 4. Make the desired VPN setting changes. 5. Tap Save. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Delete a VPN 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab More networks VPN. 2. Touch and hold the VPN to delete. 3. Tap Delete network when the pop-up displays. Near Field Communication This feature is used to read and exchange tags. When used in conjunction with Android Beam, your device can be used to beam application content when NFC-capable devices are touched. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab. 2. Tap the NFC field and verify the feature is active
(indicated by ONON
). Android Beam When Android Beam is activated, you can beam app content to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together. You can beam browser pages, YouTube videos, contacts, and more. 1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab NFC Android Beam. 2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn on Android Beam. 3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-capable device and the content is transferred. S Beam This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam large files directly to another compatible device that is in direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and videos from your gallery, music files from your music player, and more. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Connections tab. 2. Verify the NFC feature is active. 3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on. 4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on. 5. Complete the transfer process between the two NFC-enabled devices by placing them back to back. This feature can come in very handy to quickly share pictures between users with compatible S Beam devices. For more information, refer to Using S Beam to Share Pictures on page 151. Settings 239 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Nearby devices This option allows you to share your media files with nearby devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi. 1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer to Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network on page 227. 2. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab Nearby devices. 3. Tap the File sharing field to turn File sharing on. A green check mark indicates the feature is active. Once active,
(Nearby devices) displays at the top of the screen. 4. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK. 5. Tap Shared contents, then check the media type(s) to share and tap OK. 6. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected devices to allow. 9. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions to take when you upload content from other devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject. Screen Mirroring With feature enabled, you can wirelessly mirror what is currently displayed on your devices screen with an external TV via devices such as the AllShare Cast Hub. Note: Screen mirroring can only be done with a compatible wireless TV or one enabled with the AllShare Cast Hub. For more information, refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 158. 1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab Screen Mirroring. 7. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected 2. Touch and slide the Screen Mirroring slider to the right devices not to allow. 8. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any downloaded (shared) content. Choose from USB storage (Device) or SD card. 240 to turn it on. The slider color indicates the activation status. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Note: This feature allows a connection between your device and the optional AllShare Cast Hub, via a shared Wi-Fi Direct connection. The AllShare Cast Hub then allows the communicating TV to mirror what displays on the device. For more information, refer to AllShare Cast Hub on page 158. Kies via Wi-Fi 1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab More networks. 2. Tap Kies via Wi-Fi 3. Select a network connection and follow the on-screen OK. connection process. Lock Screen This menu contains features that allows you to configure the devices security parameters. Screen Unlock Pattern Overview To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every time the phone wakes up from sleep mode
(when the screen automatically turns off). From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Screen lock. My device tab Lock screen My device My device The Screen lock menu allows to choose from a variety of locking features such as:
Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.
Face unlock: Look at your phone to unlock it.
Face and voice: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.
Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or change your screen unlock pattern.
PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen. Settings 241 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will never lock. Swipe options 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Lock screen. 2. Configure one of the following options.
Multiple widgets allows you to display multiple widgets on your lock screen. Displays as an option after a lock mode is enabled.
Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that display on your home screens.
Shortcuts sets shortcuts to display at the bottom of the Lock screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on.
Unlock effect sets the effect you receive when unlocking the phone. Select None, Ripple effect, or Light effect.
Help text displays help information on the Lock screen.
Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to wake-up your phone.
Set wake-up command designates your wake-up commands. Tap Set wake-up command and follow the on-screen prompts to create a new verbal command. Using Swipe This feature is the least secure locking method and only requires that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Lock screen. 2. Tap Screen lock Swipe. Using Face Unlock This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone. This feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Lock screen. 2. Tap Screen lock Face unlock. 3. Read the on-screen notification and tap Next. 4. From the About Face Unlock screen, tap Set it up Continue. 242 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. 6. If your face is not recognized, choose an unlocking method: Pattern or PIN. Face unlock options Once Face unlock is enabled, additional options are available:
Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are displayed on your home screens.
Improve facial recognition allows you to improve your devices face matching capability by capturing your face in different lighting, with or without glasses, and bearded or clean-shaven. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Presence check requires that you blink when using the Face unlock feature. This will increase the security of the feature.
Make pattern visible: Displays the lock pattern as it is drawn.
Lock automatically locks the screen 5 seconds after the screen turns off.
Lock instantly with power key once enabled, instantly locks the screen after pressing the power key. Using Face and Voice Unlock This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone. This feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Lock screen. 2. Tap Screen lock Face and voice. 3. Read the on-screen notification and tap Next. 4. From the About Face Unlock screen, tap Set it up Continue. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. 6. Once prompted to speak and unlock command, tap and repeat the phrase four times. 7. Once complete, tap Done. Settings 243 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Setting an Unlock Pattern Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone. When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the phones buttons or touch screen. When you activate the User tactile feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern. The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts as a backup to the pattern lock. If you forget your pattern, you can regain access to the device by entering a PIN code. Note: Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Lock screen. Pattern. 2. Tap Screen lock 3. Read the instructions then tap Next. 4. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point. Then, without removing your finger from the screen, drag your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point and they highlight with a green circle. 244 5. When you connect at least four dots in a vertical, horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the screen and tap Continue. 6. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set. 7. Enter the backup PIN code and tap Continue. 8. Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and tap OK. Changing the Screen Lock Pattern This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to changing your password from time to time. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Lock screen. 2. Tap Screen lock. 3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen. 4. Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 - 7 from the previous section. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Lock screen. 2. Tap Screen lock. 3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen. 4. Tap None. Pattern options Once an unlock pattern is enabled, additional options are available:
Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are displayed on your home screens.
Make pattern visible displays the pattern as you draw it.
Lock automatically allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.
Lock instantly with power key allows you to lock the screen by pressing
. What If I Forget my Pattern?
If you forget your device's lock pattern, you can unlock your device or reset it using your Google Account credentials. When you enter the wrong unlock pattern too many times, you should see an option at the bottom of the screen that says Forgot pattern? Follow these steps to use either your PIN or email address. Important! You can only enter an incorrect lock pattern 5 times before the device is locked. Important! If you are unsuccessful in retrieving your lock pattern or unlocking your device, please contact T-Mobile for assistance. To unlock your device with a PIN code:
1. Tap Forgot pattern? (located at the bottom of the screen). 2. Scroll down and tap the Type PIN code field and use the on-screen keypad to enter the backup PIN code you setup when you created your lock pattern. 3. Tap OK. Settings 245 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. If you have forgotten your current pattern, tap Pattern from the Screen unlock settings menu and follow the procedures outlined in Setting an Unlock Pattern on page 244 to create a new pattern. To unlock your device using your Google account:
1. Tap Forgot pattern? (located at the bottom of the screen). 2. Tap the Username (email) and Password fields, use the 3. on-screen keyboard to enter your Google Account credentials, and tap Sign in to complete the login process. If you have forgotten your Google Account credentials, visit the Google website to recover them. If you still cannot get your Google Account credentials, contact your wireless carrier for additional options. PIN Lock and Unlock 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Lock screen. 2. Tap Screen lock PIN. 3. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch Continue to confirm the password. 4. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm. Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order to unlock the phone. Password Lock and Unlock 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Lock screen. 2. Tap Screen lock. 3. Tap Password. 4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to confirm the password. 5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm. 246 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Lock screen widgets This option allows you to lock the widgets that display on your home screens. From the Home screen, press and then tap My device tab Lock screen My device My device Settings widgets. The following options display:
Favorite apps or Camera: You can display your Favorite Apps or the Camera on the Lock screen. Favorite Apps is the default selection.
Clock or personal message: You can display the clock or a personal message on the Lock screen. Touch Clock to display the clock, or touch Personal message, then touch Save.
Edit personal information: Allows you to enter the personal message to display on the Lock screen. Display Settings In this menu, you can change various settings for the display such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock feature, animation, brightness, and screen timeout, and power saving mode. Adjusting the Screen Display 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings My device tab Display. My device My device 2. Configure the following screen display settings:
Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen, Lock screen, or both.
Notification panel: allows you to set the brightness of your notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons that you want to display at the top of the notification panel
(page 38).
Brightness: adjusts the on-screen brightness level. For more information, refer to Adjusting Screen Brightness on page 248. Settings 247 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Auto-rotate screen: when enabled, the phone automatically switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa. When this setting is disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode only.
Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.
Daydream: allows you to control what your screen does when your device is docked or sleeping. Tap the adjacent OFF / ON icon to turn it on. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are: Default font, Choco cooky, Cool jazz, Rosemary, Samsung Sans or Get fonts online. Tap Get fonts online to download additional fonts.
Font size: allows you to select which size of font displays.
Touch key light duration: allows you to adjust the delay before the Touch key light automatically turns off.
Show battery percentage: to activate/deactivate the display of battery charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of the screen. 248
Edit after screen capture: Automatically displays the Edit screen after a screen capture.
Auto adjust screen tone: Saves power by adjusting the screen tone according to image analysis. Assigning a Wallpaper The Wallpaper settings option allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen, Lock screen, or both. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Display Wallpaper. 2. Select an available option to change its current wallpaper. For more information, refer to Managing Wallpapers on page 52. Adjusting Screen Brightness This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Display Brightness. 2. Touch and slide the on-screen slider to adjust the level and tap OK. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Sound Settings From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well as configure the display settings. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings My device tab Sound. My device My device The following options display:
Silent mode via Device Options Screen Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an alert. 1. From the Home screen, press and hold
(Power/End) until the Device options screen displays. 2. Tap either Mute, Vibrate, or Sound from the Device options screen to activate or deactivate these features
(the current mode displays). Adjusting the Volume Settings The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings within one on-screen popup menu. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the My device tab Sound Volume. 2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume settings for any of the following volume levels.
Music, video, games, and other media, Ringtone, Notifications or System. 3. Tap OK to assign the volume levels. Setup the Ringtones This option allows you to set the ringtone. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the My device tab Sound. 2. Tap Ringtones. 3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly plays when selected. 4. Tap Add to locate a compatible media file to use as a ringtone. 5. Tap OK to assign a ringer. Settings 249 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Setup the Vibration This option allows you to set your device to vibrate and ring. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the My device tab Sound. 2. Tap Vibrations. 3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK. or Tap Create to then use an on-screen touch circle to create your own custom vibration pattern. Tap Save to store the new vibration pattern. Default Notification Sound This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for notifications and alarms. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the My device tab Sound. 2. Tap Default notification sound. 3. Select a ringtone and tap OK. Setting up Vibration When Ringing This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the My device tab Sound. 2. Tap the Vibrate when ringing field to activate the feature. Audible System Tone Settings These options are used when you use the dialing pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the screen. Each time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone sounds. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the My device tab Sound. 2. Tap Dialing keypad tone to activate a tone when you use on-screen keys. A check mark displayed next to these features indicates active status. 3. Tap Touch sounds to activate a tone when you touch the screen. A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status. 250 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. Tap Screen lock sound to activate a tone when you use the Lock screen. A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status. 5. Tap Emergency tone and tap Off, Alert, or Vibrate to determine the type of tone to play for Emergency alerts. Adapt Sound The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call sounds. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the My device tab Sound Adapt Sound. 2. Read the instructions and tap Start. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your personal call sound. Home Screen Mode This application allows you to set your display to the conventional layout of Standard mode or provide an easier user experience for the first-time smartphone users using Easy mode. 1. From the Home screen, press My device tab and then tap Home Settings screen mode. My device My device 2. Tap the pull-down Dropbox and select one of the following options:
Standard mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and widgets on your home screens.
Easy mode: provides easier user experience for first-time smartphone users on the home screens. 3. Tap Apply and give your device a few seconds to update the device with the new look and feel. Settings 251 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Call Settings
. and then tap Call settings. 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press or From the Home screen, press Settings My device My device My device tab Call. To access the Call settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press and then tap Call settings. Phone. 252 Configuring General Call Settings Configure the general call settings using this option. Phone. Press 1. From the Home screen, tap and then tap Call settings. and then tap 2. Tap one of the following options:
Call rejection: allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection list. Auto reject mode: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or messages. Auto reject list: provides access to current rejection entries and numbers.
Set up call rejection messages: allows you to manage both existing rejection messages and create new ones.
Answering/ending calls: allows you to manage the settings for answering and ending calls.
Turn off screen during calls: allows you to force the screen to turn off during an active call.
Call alerts: allows you to assign call alert tones and activate call alerts and vibration. Call vibrations: vibrates the phone when the called party answers. Choose from: Answer vibration or Call-end vibration. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Call status tones: assigns sounds settings during the call. Choose from: Call connect tone, Minute minder, and Call end tone. Alerts during calls: selects whether alarm and message notification is turned off during a call.
Call accessories: sets the headset settings for incoming calls. Automatic answering: automatically answers a call when a headset is connected. Automatic answering timer: sets a timer to delay automatic answering for incoming calls. Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when the device is locked or only when the device is locked. Ringtone and keypad tones 1. From the main Call settings page, tap Ringtones and keypad tones. 2. Tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and tap OK. 3. Tap Add, locate an audio file and create a ringtone. 4. Tap Vibrations, select a vibration type, and tap OK. 5. Tap Create and begin creating a custom vibration. 6. Tap Vibrate when ringing if you want the phone to vibrate when a call is incoming. 7. Tap Keypad tones if you want tones to play when you press the keypad. Personalize call sound This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear during a call with and without earphones. From the main Call settings page, tap Personalize call sound and activate the feature by selecting an available option. For more information, see Adapt Sound on page 251. Noise reduction This option allows you to suppress background noise during a call. From the main Call settings page, tap Noise reduction to enable the feature. Increase volume in pocket This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its location. From the main Call settings page, tap Increase volume in pocket to enable the feature. Settings 253 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Voicemail service You can view your voicemail number from this menu. 1. From the main Call settings page, tap Voicemail 2. service. If an additional voicemail service is in use (other than carrier), tap Voice settings to now view your selected voicemail number and information. Sound - Device Ringtone This option allows you to assign your default device ringtone. 1. From the main Call settings page, tap Sound. 2. Select a ringtone and tap OK. Vibrate This option allows you to activate a vibration for an incoming call. From the main Call settings page, tap Vibrate to toggle the feature on or off. Auto retry Auto Retry automatically re-dials a number at a preset interval, when there is no answer or the dialed party is busy. Depending upon your location, the number of times your phone re-dials a number may vary. From the main Call settings page, tap Auto retry to toggle the feature on or off. TTY Mode A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf, hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to communicate by telephone. Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones. Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phones headset jack. If this cable was not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the connector cable. 1. From the main Call settings page, tap TTY mode. 254 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 2. Tap TTY Full, TTY HCO, or TTY VCO to activate the feature, or TTY Off to deactivate the feature. Off is the default setting. DTMF tones DTMF tones let you select the length of the tone (Normal or Long) that the keypad generates each time you press a key. Note: The Long setting can be useful with automated systems. 1. From the main Call settings page, tap DTMF tones. 2. Touch Normal or Long. Voice Privacy Use this setting to activate enhanced privacy mode. Note: If Enhanced voice security is unavailable at a particular location, you phone reverts temporarily to Standard voice security. Touch Voice privacy to activate Enhanced privacy mode. Blocking Mode When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected features are disabled. You will only receive notifications of incoming calls from people on your allowed list. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings My device tab. My device My device 2. Slide the Blocking mode slider to the right to turn it on. displays in Confirm the Blocking mode active icon the Status bar. 3. Place a green check mark adjacent to those features to enable. Choose from: Turn off incoming calls, Turn off notifications, and Turn off alarm and timer. 4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active. Remove the check mark from the Always field to configure the From and To time fields. 5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign contacts that are exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts display in the Allowed contact list. Settings 255 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Driving Mode When this feature is activated, all incoming calls and new notifications are automatically read out loud. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings My device tab. My device My device 2. Slide the Driving mode slider to the right to turn it on. displays in Confirm the Driving mode active icon the Status bar. Power Saving Mode This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a power saving mode and configure additional power saving options manually, all in an effort to conserve battery power. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings mode. My device tab Power saving My device My device 2. Slide the slider to the right to turn it on. 3. Tap the following options to create a check mark and conserve power:
CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum performance of the CPU.
Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power level. 4. Tap Learn about Power saving mode to learn about various ways to conserve battery power. When the power gets low, confirm of the screen. This indicates the power saving mode is active. displays at the top 256 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Accessory This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when using a car or desk dock. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap My device tab Accessory. 2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or Settings My device My device removing the device from the dock. 3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock speakers when the device is docked. 4. Tap Desk home screen display if you wish to show the desk home screen when the device is docked. Accessibility Settings This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility applications that aid in navigating your Android device, such as TalkBack (uses synthesized speech to describe the results of actions), KickBack (provides haptic feedback for actions), and SoundBack (plays sounds for various actions). Also lets you enable use of the power key to end calls. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap My device tab Accessibility. Settings My device My device Note: Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility 5. Tap Screen wake-up if you want to turn on the screen applications from the Play Store. when you blip the cover open. 6. Tap Automatic unlock if you want to flip open the cover to unlock the screen when secure lock is disabled. 7. Tap Brightness then slide the slider and tap OK to adjust the brightness level used when you open the cover. 2. Select the Auto-rotate screen field to activate this feature which automatically rotates an available screen. 3. Tap Screen timeout to timeout the accessibility feature after a defined amount of time. 4. Select the Speak passwords field to activate this feature which reads out password information. Settings 257 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 5. Select Answering/ending calls field to select the methods you can use to answer and end a call. 6. Tap Show shortcut allows you to press and hold
(Power/End) to use the accessibility shortcut under the Device options screen. 7. Tap Manage accessibility to save and update your accessibility settings or share them with another device. You can export your settings, import a previously saved file, or share your file with another device. 8. Tap TalkBack to activate the feature. TalkBack speaks feedback to help blind and low-vision users. Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter, except passwords, including personal data and credit card numbers. It may also log your user interface interactions with the device. 9. Tap the Font size field to change the size of the fonts used on the device within menus, options, etc.. Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge. 258 10. Enable Magnification gestures to use exaggerated gestures such as triple-tapping, double pinching, and dragging two fingers across the screen. 11. Tap Negative colors to reverse the colors of the screen. 12. Enable Color adjustment to manually adjust display colors and then tap Start. 13. Tap Accessibility shortcut to allow you to quickly enable accessibility features in 2 quick steps. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen instructions. 14. Tap the Text-to-speech options field to configure the text to speech configuration parameters. 15. Tap the Enhance web accessibility field to allow apps to install scripts from Google that make their Web content more accessible. 16. Use the Sound balance field to allow you to use the slider to set the Left and Right balance when using a stereo device. 17. Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a single earbud/earphone. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 18. Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound made by the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc.. 19. Tap Flash notification to allows you to set your camera light to blink whenever you receive a notification. 20. Enable the Assistant menu to allow you to improve the device accessibility for users with reduced dexterity. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen instructions. 21. Tap the Press and hold delay field to select a time interval for this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long. 22. Enable Interaction control to allows you to enable or disable motions and screen timeout. You can also block areas of the screen from touch interaction. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen instructions. Language and Input Settings This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings input. My device tab Language and My device My device Language Settings To set the language that the menus display on the phone:
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Language and input Language. 2. Select a language and region from the list. Choose Input Method 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Language and input Default. 2. Select an input method. or Tap Set up input methods to alter/modify the available input methods. Settings 259 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Configure Google Voice Typing Samsung Keyboard Settings 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Language and input. or From a screen where you can enter text, in a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the Select input bottom of the screen, then select method Set up input methods. 2. Tap 3. Select a language by tapping Choose input languages
(next to the Google voice typing field). area. 4. Remove the check mark from the Automatic field. This allows you to select additional languages. 5. Select the desired languages. 6. Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of known offensive words or language. (A blue check mark indicates the feature is active). 7. Tap Download offline speech recognition to enable speech recognition via locally stored files so that even if you are not connected to a network you can still use the service. 260 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab
(next to the Samsung Language and input keyboard field). or From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold Input Methods, drag across the icons, and select Settings to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen. 2. Set any of the following options:
Alphabets allows you to choose a keyboard configuration
(Qwerty keyboard [default] or 3x4 keyboard).
Numbers and symbols allows you to choose a keyboard configuration for numbers and symbols (Qwerty keyboard
[default] or 3x4 keyboard).
Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from the available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected language.
Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and hold to access the advanced settings. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential SwiftKey Flow a Samsung keyboard feature that allows you to slide your fingers between keys without lifting them to type words.
Cursor control allows you to slide your fingers across the Predictive Text - Advanced Settings The predictive text system provides next-letter prediction and regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards. keyboard to move the cursor.
Key-tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an on-screen key.
Advanced provides access to additional settings such as:
Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence (standard English style). Auto spacing automatically inserts space between words. Auto-punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen QWERTY keyboard. Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string. This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key.
Help launches a brief on-screen help tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.
Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their original configuration. Note: Only available when ABC mode is selected. Predictive text advanced settings are available only if the Predictive function is enabled. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab next to the Samsung Language and input keyboard field. or From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold Input Methods keyboard settings screen. to reveal the Samsung 2. Slide the Predictive text slider to the right to turn it on. Settings 261 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 3. Tap the Predictive text field and configure any of the
Clear personal data removes all personalized data entered by following advanced options:
Personalized data activate this feature to use the personal language data that you have entered and selected to make your text entry prediction results better. By enabling this feature you can choose from the following personalization features:
Learn from Facebook allows you to log into your current Facebook account and add used text to your personal dictionary.
Learn from Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from where your style and existing contact information is added to your personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.
Learn from Twitter allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account and add used text to your personal dictionary.
Learn from Messaging allows your device to learn your messaging style by using your Messaging information.
Learn from Contacts updates predictive style by learning your Contacts style.
Clear remote data allows you to delete your anonymous data stored on the personalization server. the user. 4. Press to return to the previous screen. Swype Settings To configure Swype settings:
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Language and input next to the Swype field. 2. Tap Settings to alter these parameters:
Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter text using the keypad.
Sound on keypress: turns on sounds generated by the Swype application.
Pop-up on keypress: turns on the display of characters above keys when typing.
Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to display the complete Swype path.
Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence.
Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words. When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word. 262 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in your text string based on your current text entries.
Show Voice key: once enabled, shows an Voice to text key within the on-screen keyboard. 3. Tap My Words to configure various Dictionary and Data Management features.
Backup & Sync: when active, allows you to backup your Swype dictionary and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.
Living Language: allows you to automatically update Swype with popular new words. Tap OK to continue the process.
Social integration: allows you to log into the available social media accounts to add help personalize your personal dictionary with commonly used words or names from your available accounts. Choose from the following social media types:
Facebook: allows you to log into your current Facebook account from where contact names are added to your Swypes personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text fields. Helps recognize familiar names. Twitter: allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account from where names and words are added to your personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names and words. Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from where existing contact information is added to your personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.
Edit my dictionary: allows you to edit your current personal Swype dictionary.
Clear language data: allows you to delete all personal language data, including your defined words.
Contribute usage data: when enabled, allows the Nuance application to collect usage data for better word predictions.
Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by the Swype application so it can receive program updates, language downloads, and other related features via your existing data connection. 4. Tap Languages to activate and select the current text input language. Default language is US English.
Download languages: allows you to download additional languages.
The Active field displays the current language. Settings 263 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 5. Tap Gestures to view an on-screen reference page
Download offline speech recognition: enables voice input related to Gesture usage. while offline. 6. Tap Help to review help information for the Swype functionality and view information about the version.
Bluetooth headset: records audio through a connected Bluetooth headset. 7. Tap Updates to update the application if new software 3. Press to return to the previous screen. is available. Configuring Voice Input Recognition This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal input. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Language and input. 2. Tap Voice search to configure the following:
Language: choose a language for your voice input.
Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output always or only when using hands-free.
Block offensive words: enable or disable blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input Google searches.
Hotword detection: enable to being able to launch voice search by saying the word Google. Configuring Text-to-speech This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller information. This action is called TTS (Text To Speech). 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Language and input Text-to-speech options. 2. Select a current Preferred TTS engine from the list of available options. Select Samsung text-to-speech engine or Google Text-to-speech Engine. The default is Google Text-to-speech. 3. Tap next to the preferred TTS engine configure the following settings:
Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.
Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to view Open Source Licenses. 264 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech synthesis. 4. Configure the General options to alter the settings associated with this feature:
Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by the device. Choose from: Very slow, Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very fast.
Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-
to-speech feature sounds like on your device when activated. Configuring the Mouse-TrackPad This feature allows you to configure the pointer speed for a connected mouse or trackpad. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Language and input Pointer speed. 2. Adjust the slider and tap OK. Motions and gestures The Motions and Gestures settings allow you to set up various Motion activation services. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Motions and gestures. Motions Motion allows you to control your device by performing natural movements. 1. From the Motions and gestures screen, touch Motion. 2. Slide the Motion slider to the right to turn it on. 3. Slide the slider to the right next to each of the following options to activate the feature:
Direct call: The device dials the currently displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the device to your ear.
Smart alert: Pickup the device for an alert and notification when you have missed calls or messages.
Zoom: From a screen where you can zoom content, touch and hold two points on the display then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.
Move an icon: Moves an icon to another page by holding the icon, then moving the device to the left or right. Settings 265 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Browse an image: Touch and hold a desired on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally. Gyroscope calibration Gyroscope calibration allows you to calibrate motion correctly using the devices built-in gyroscope.
Mute/pause: Mutes incoming calls and any playing sounds 1. From the Motions and gestures screen, touch when you turn the device display down on a surface. gyroscope calibration. Palm motion Palm motion allows you to control your device by touching your screen with the palm of your hand. 1. From the Motions and gestures screen, touch Motion. 2. Slide the Palm motion slider to the right to turn it on. 3. Tap Palm motion then slide the slider to the right next to Mute/pause if you want to pause any on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the current video or unmuting the current sound. 2. Place your device on a flat surface. 3. Touch Calibrate. When finished, the message Calibrated displays. Smart screen The Smart screen options allow you to customize your screen settings to make the screen more responsive and easier to use. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings My device My device My device tab Smart screen. 2. Tap the Smart stay feature to disable the screen timeout if your phone detects that your face is watching the screen. 266 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Voice control The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice commands to control your device. 1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab Voice control. 2. Verify the feature is active by tapping ONON at the top of your screen to activate Voice control. 3. The following options are available. Tap an option to create a check mark and activate the feature.
Incoming calls: allows you to answer or reject calls using the commands Answer and Reject.
Alarm: allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the commands Stop and Snooze.
Camera: allows you to take pictures using the voice commands Smile, Cheese, Capture, or Shoot.
Music: allows you to control your Music player using the voice commands Next, Previous, Pause, Play, Volume Up, and Volume Down. Note: If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration, voice control will not be available. Add Account This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize accounts, including your Google and email accounts. Adding an Account 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Accounts tab. 2. Tap Add account from the My accounts area and select one of the account types. 3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your credentials and set up the account. 4. A green circle displays next to the account type once the account is created. Your email account also displays in the Accounts section of the main Settings menu. Settings 267 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Removing an Account Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its messages, contacts, and other data from the device. 1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab. 2. Tap the account name displayed in the My accounts area. 3. Tap the account entry from the Accounts area of the screen. 4. Tap Remove account, then tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the account and delete all its messages, contacts, and other data. Synchronizing Accounts By default, all managed accounts are synchronized. You can also manually sync all current accounts. 1. From the main Settings page, tap the Accounts tab. 2. Tap the accuont name displayed in the My accounts area on the screen. 3. Tap the account name entry. 4. Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or tap Sync all to synchronize all your accounts. Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization. 5. Tap Settings to access your account settings. Backing up to the Cloud Back up your personal data using your Samsung Account or use Dropbox to sync your device content. 268 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Adding a Cloud-based account 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Accounts tab. 2. Touch Cloud Add account. 3. If you have not signed in to your Samsung Account, touch Add account. and create an account. or If you signed in to your account, touch your Samsung Account to manage your sync settings or remove your Samsung Account. 4. Touch Storage usage to show the storage used and the remaining storage available. 5. Touch Sync settings to sync your calendar, contacts, Internet, and Memo settings with your Samsung Account. 6. Touch Backup to manage your back up and restore options. 7. Touch Restore to retrieve data from your Samsung 8. account. If you are not signed in to your Dropbox account, touch Link Dropbox account. Backup and Reset Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to erase all personal data. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings Accounts tab Backup and reset. Mobile Backup and Restore The device can be configured to back up your current settings, application data and settings. 1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab Backup and reset. 2. Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current phone settings and applications. 3. Tap Backup account to assign the account being backed up. 4. Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re-installation of a previously installed application (including preferences and data). 5. Tap Factory data reset to reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings. For more information, refer to Factory Data Reset on page 273. Settings 269 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 6. Tap Collect diagnostics to collects diagnostic data for To copy contacts from a memory card back to your device:
troubleshooting use. Backing up Your Data Before Factory Reset Backing Up Your Contacts using a Memory card Before initiating a factory reset, it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use. Important! If you choose to back up contacts to your SIM card, all information other than name and number is lost. Therefore, it is recommended that you back up contacts to your memory card. To export a Contact list to your memory card:
1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press 3. Tap Export to SD card OK. The contacts are stored in and then tap Import/Export. Contacts. a .vcf file on your SD card. For more information, refer to Export/Import on page 105. 270 1. From the Home screen, tap 2. Press and then tap Import/Export Import from Contacts. USB storage. 3. At the Save contact to prompt, tap Device. The contacts on the SD card are copied to your phone. Backing Up Media to your PC You can back up your pictures, videos, documents, and other media to your PC. You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and copy files back and forth between your phone and PC. If you insert an SD card in the device, you can also access the files directory from the SD card by using your device as a memory card reader. 1. Connect the USB cable to your device, then connect the cable to your PC USB port. After a few seconds, a pop-up window displays on the PC when it is connected with your device. 2. On the PC pop-up, click Open device to view files. 3. Verify your device displays as a removable disk on your PC. Once connected, you can access the Phone folder
(internal phone memory) and the Card folder (SD card). By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. Select the location where the files are that you would like to copy to your PC (Phone or Card). 5. Select the folders where the information is kept. This would include folders such as DCIM (camera pictures and videos), Pictures, Music, Playlists, Download, etc. 6. Select the files that you want to copy and copy them
(Control C - copy) to a folder on your PC (Control V -
paste). 7. Disconnect the USB cable from your phone and the PC. 8. To copy files on your PC back to your phone, simply reverse the procedure. Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Gallery). 2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos. 3. Remove both the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating the process. Backing Up Media to your SD card You can back up your pictures, videos, documents, and other media to your SD card. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps My Files). 2. Select the folder where the files are that you would like to copy to the SD card. This would include folders such as DCIM (camera pictures and videos), Pictures, Music, Apps Playlists, Download, etc. For example, tap My Files Images Camera. 3. Tap the files that you want to copy to create a check mark in the box next to the filename. 4. Tap the options icon in the top right corner of the display. 5. Select Copy 6. Go to the folder on your SD card where you would like SD memory card. to copy to files to. For example, Pictures. 7. Tap Paste here in the top right corner of the display. 8. The files are copied to the folder. Settings 271 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Backing Up Internet Bookmarks to your Samsung Account You can back up your Internet bookmarks by using your Samsung account. Only bookmarks you have added (non-
default) can be backed up. 1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab. 2. Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap Add account and select Samsung account. 3. Sign in to your Samsung account or tap Create new account if you don't have one yet. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. From the Home screen, tap Apps
(Internet). 5. From the webpage, tap 6. Press 7. Place a check mark on those Bookmarks you want to and then tap Move to folder. Bookmarks. back up, then tap Done. 8. Select a location or folder. The Bookmarks that you moved are now listed under the Samsung account heading in your Bookmark list. 272 9. When you get a new phone, update your software, or reset your device, sign in to your Samsung account and the backed up bookmarks display on your Bookmarks page under the Samsung account heading. Backing Up Settings to Google You can use your Google account to back up apps, Wi-Fi passwords, and other data. 1. From the Home screen, tap Apps Gmail. 2. Tap Existing if you have a Google account. The Inbox loads conversations and email. or Tap New if you do not have a Google account. 3. Confirm that immediately after signing in to your Google account, the Backup and restore screen displays. 4. From within the Backup and restore screen, tap the checkbox next to Keep this phone backed up with my Google Account field. 5. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab Backup and reset. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 6. Tap Back up my data to create a check mark. This will back up your app data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other settings. 7. Your Google account should be listed under the Backup Add account and option. If not, Tap Backup account sign into your Google account. 8. Tap the checkbox next to Automatic restore to create a check mark. This will restore the settings that were backed up when you re-install an application. Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings. 1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab Backup and reset Factory data reset. 2. Read the on-screen reset information. 3. Tap Reset device. 4. If necessary, enter your password and tap Delete all. The device resets to the factory default settings automatically and when finished displays the Home screen. Location Services The Location services allows you to configure the devices location services. Important! The more location determining functions are enabled, the more accurate the determination is of your position. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap More tab Location services. Settings 2. Tap any of the following options to create a check mark and activate the service:
Access to my location: allows apps that have asked your permission to use your location information. Tap the ON/OFF slider to turn it on.
Use GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint your location.
Use wireless networks: allows applications to use data from mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.
My places: allows you to add location information for your Home, Office, and Car. Settings 273 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Enabling the GPS Satellites 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location services. 2. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite. Using Wireless Networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use wireless networks option. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location services. 2. Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data from sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location. Enabling My Places 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location services. 2. Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite locations. Security The Security settings allow you to determine the security level for your device. Encrypt Device When enabled, this feature requires a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your device each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD card each time it is connected:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings More tab Security. 2. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the displayed help screen. 3. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption on SD card data that requires a password be entered each time the microSD card is connected. Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent. Encryption may take an hour or more. 274 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Password Settings When you create a phone password you can also configure the phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an asterisk (*). 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security. 2. Tap Make passwords visible to activate this feature. Device Administration Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen. The phone could be deactivated or restricted (through administration) from a remote location. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security. 2. Tap Device administrators to begin configuring this setting. 3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts. Unknown Sources Before you can download a web application you must enable the Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can use this option to install non-Play Store applications. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security. 2. Tap Unknown sources to active this feature. Verify Apps Allows you to block or warn yourself before installing apps that can cause harm. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security. 2. Tap Verify apps to active this feature. Note: Enabling this feature can prevent installation of some applications from the Play Store. Settings 275 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Credential Storage This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates and other credentials. Certificates and credentials can be installed to the SD card and password protected. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security. 2. Tap Trusted credentials to display only trusted CA certificates. A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure credentials. 3. Tap Install from device storage to install encrypted certificates from the USB Storage location. 4. Tap Clear credentials to clear the device (SD card or phone memory) of all certificate contents and reset the credentials password. Application Manager This device can be used for Android development. You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run the applications using the hardware, system, and network. This feature allows you to configure the device for development. Warning! Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk. This menu allows you to manage installed applications. You can view and control currently running services, or use the device for application development. You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings ALL. More tab Application manager 276 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Clearing Application Cache and Data 5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then Important! You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Application manager. 2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data. 3. Tap Force stop, Uninstall, Clear data, Clear cache, or Clear defaults. Uninstalling Third-party Applications Important! You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Application manager. 2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab and select your desired application. 3. Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the Application info page). 4. At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application. tap OK. Memory Usage See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running applications. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Applications manager. 2. Tap DOWNLOADED, RUNNING, or ALL to display memory usage for that category of applications. The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom of the Running tab shows used and free RAM. Downloaded Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Applications manager. 2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab to view a list of all the downloaded applications on your device. 3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the Downloaded tabs, press Sort by name. and select Sort by size or Settings 277 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 4. Tap an application to view and update information about the application, including memory usage, default settings, and permissions. Running Services The Running services option allows you to view and control currently running services such as Backup, Google Hangouts, SNS (messaging), Swype, and more. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Application manager. 2. Tap the RUNNING tab to view all currently active and running applications. This tab also shows the total RAM being used by these currently active applications. 3. Tap a process and select Stop to end the process and stop it from running. When you stop the process the service or application will no longer run until you start the process or application again. 4. Tap Show cached processes to view additional cached applications. Important! Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the application. 278 Storage Used This option allows you to view a list (on the current tab) of current applications as sorted by size. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Application manager. 2. Tap the ALL tab to display all available applications. and then tap Sort by size to change the 3. Press current list to show items based on the amount of storage they occupy. Reset App Preferences This feature provides you with the ability to reset all preferences for the following features: Disabled apps, Disabled app notifications, Default applications for actions, and Background data restrictions. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Applications manager. 2. Tap the ALL tab to display all available applications. 3. Press and then tap Reset app preferences Reset apps. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Important! As an example, if you assigned your browser to always launch YouTube links and want that changed, you must reset the default actions. Battery Usage This option allows you to view a list of those components using battery power. The amount of time the battery was used also displays. Battery usage displays in percentages per application. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings level displays in percentage. More tab Battery. The battery 2. From the upper-right tap
(Refresh) to update the list. or Tap an entry to view more detailed information. Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery use. SD Card & Device Storage From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.
microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 4GB.
microSDHC memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB.
microSDXC memory card types can include capacities greater than 32GB. To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
and then tap From the Home screen, press More tab Storage. Settings The available memory displays under the Total space and SD card headings. Important! DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or transferring files. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data. Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD card. Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs out while you are using the microSD card. Settings 279 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Erasing Files from the SD card To erase files from the SD card using the device:
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. 2. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Storage Mount SD card. 3. Tap Format SD card Format SD card Delete all to format the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all the data stored on it. Mounting the SD Card To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Storage. 2. Tap Mount SD card. Unmounting the SD card Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD card while removing it from the slot. 1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Storage. 2. Tap Unmount SD card OK. 3. After the SD card will be unmounted message displays and the Mount SD card now displays in the menu list, remove the SD card. 280 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Date and Time This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed. 1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings More tab Date and time. 2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network set the date and time. About Device This menu contains legal information, system tutorial information, and other phone information such as the model number, firmware version, baseband version, kernel version, and software build number. To access phone information:
From the Home screen, press and then tap Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set the rest of the options. 3. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the Month, Day, and Year then tap Set. 4. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour, and Minute. Tap PM or AM, then tap Set. 5. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the time zone information automatically. 6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone. 7. Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the device automatically uses a 12-hour format. 8. Tap Select date format and select the date format type. More tab About device. The Settings following information displays:
Software update: allows you to connect to the network and upload any new phone software directly to your device. The device automatically updates with the latest available software when you access this option.
Status: displays Battery status, Battery level (as percentage), Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state, Roaming, Mobile network state, My phone number, IMEI, IMEISV, IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, Up time, and Device status. Settings 281 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Legal information: This option displays information about Open source licences, and Google legal information. This information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more pertinent information as a reference. Read the information and terms, then press the Settings menu. to return to
Device name: allows you to both display and edit the devices name.
Model number: displays the devices model number.
Android version: displays the firmware version loaded on this device.
Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this device.
Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this device.
Build number: displays the software, build number.
SELinux status: displays the status for SELinux.
Secure boot status: displays the Samsung boot status. 282
Hardware version: displays the version of hardware for this device. Note: Firmware, baseband, kernel and build numbers are usually used for updates to the handset or support. For additional information please contact your Customer Service Representative for more information. Software Update The Software Update feature enables you to use your device to connect to the network and upload any new software directly to your device. The device automatically updates with the latest available software when you access this option. To update your device:
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap More tab About device Settings Software update. 2. Read the Software update information screen. 3. Select an available option:
Note: You configure the devices software update parameters. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Cancel: Tap this option to cancel the operation.
Wi-Fi settings: Enable this option to only download available updates using via an active Wi-Fi connection. If disabled, the device uses its connection for available downloads.
OK: Tap this option to connect to the remote server, detect if there is an available update, the begin the download over your existing data connection. Software updates can include bug fixes, enhancements to services, to the device or currently installed software. Settings 283 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 11: Health and Safety Information This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi mode in the 2.4 and 5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices operating within 5.15-5.25 GHz may only be used indoors, not outside, in order to avoid interference with Mobile Satellite Services (MSS). Therefore, this device is restricted from being used outdoors when operating in frequencies between 5.15-5.25 GHz. This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your phone. The terms mobile device or cell phone are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before using your mobile device. Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF) exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the following information:
284 Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems. Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems. The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy. Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material. The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy, including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies. While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat. Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed. The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge. Some of these studies are described below. Interphone Study Interphone is a large international study designed to determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls. Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than hour per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a Health and Safety Information 285 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data. Additional information about Interphone can be found at http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf. Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field. International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users
(COSMOS) The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html. 286 Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
(MOBI-KIDS) MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39. Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program of the National Cancer Institute The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at http://seer.cancer.gov/. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Cell Phone Industry Actions Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following:
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user; and
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information on cell phone use and human health concerns. The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public. Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head and the cell phone. Hands-Free Kits Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth headsets and various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones. Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body. Health and Safety Information 287 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving. Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike hands-free kits, these so-called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in RF absorption. 288 Children and Cell Phones The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers as well.
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone. Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists. Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations (updated 10/1/2010):
FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government. These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations: the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy. The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). Health and Safety Information 289 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum reported value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone. Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a minimum of 1.0 cm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. This mobile phone has a FCC ID number: A3LSCHR970 [Model Number: SCH-R970] and the specific SAR levels for this mobile phone can be found at the following FCC website:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/. The SAR information for this device can also be found on Samsungs website:
http://www.samsung.com/sar. SAR information on this and other model phones can be accessed online on the FCC's website through http://
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional 290 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential SAR information can also be obtained at http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-
cellular-telephones. FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS) This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";
which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be available. For more information, please contact your wireless provider. Health and Safety Information 291 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Smart Practices While Driving On the Road - Off the Phone The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle. Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions. Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in certain areas. 292 Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call go to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember, driving comes first, not the call!
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these tips:
Use a hands-free device;
Secure your phone within easy reach;
Place calls when you are not moving;
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving and will suspend the call if necessary;
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines, penalties, or other damages. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver's clear view of the street and traffic. Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle. Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games while operating a vehicle. For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org. Battery Use and Safety Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage. Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries and, particularly, from the continued use of damaged batteries.
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids. Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working properly.
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures.
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or the battery may explode when overheated.
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service center. Health and Safety Information 293 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the object causing the short-circuiting. Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are specifically designed for your phone. WARNING!
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious hazard. 294 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine Samsung accessories. Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and accessories may not be available in your area. We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile device by working with respected take-back companies in every state in the country. Drop It Off You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be found at:
http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp
. Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at these locations for no fee. Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/
index.htm or at http://www.call2recycle.org/. Mail It In The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to http://fun.samsungmobileusa.com/recycling/index.jsp. Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278-0799. Health and Safety Information 295 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET. THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION. Display / Touch-Screen Please note the following information when using your mobile device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you. Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices and batteries Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect the environment - recycle!
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode. UL Certified Travel Charger The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions per UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. 296 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more information, please refer to the Standard Limited Warranty. GPS Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance of location-based technology on your mobile device. Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your ability; and
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder instructs you. Navigation Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over time. In some areas, complete information may not be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them. All users should pay attention to road conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs. Emergency Calls This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances. Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential communications (medical emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to Health and Safety Information 297 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength. Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device networks or when certain network services and/or mobile device features are in use. Check with local service providers. To make an emergency call:
If the mobile device is not on, switch it on. 1. 2. From the Home screen, touch to launch the Phone Dialer. 3. Key in the emergency number for your present location
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number). Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Touch to place the call. If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may first need to deactivate those features before you can make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device 298 may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do so. Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years:
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Extreme heat or cold Avoid temperatures below 0C / 32F or above 45C /
113F. Microwaves Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven. Doing so may cause a fire or explosion. Dust and dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand. Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution. Shock or vibration Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards. Paint Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the devices moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation. Responsible Listening Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss. Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones Health and Safety Information 299 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and equipment. You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device:
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source.
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately.
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to.
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using earbuds. 300
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time is required before you hearing could be affected.
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor. You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources:
American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300 Reston, VA 20190 Voice: (800) 222-2336 Email: info@audiology.org Internet:
http://www.audiology.org/Pages/
default.aspx By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive, MSC 2320 Bethesda, MD 20892-2320 Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov Internet:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington, DC 20201 Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
(1-800-356-4674) 1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636) Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328 Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov Internet:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/
default.html 1-888-232-6348 TTY Operating Environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Health and Safety Information 301 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Implantable Medical Devices A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device. Persons who have such devices:
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference;
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place;
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device, consult your health care provider. For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-
faqs.html#. 302 Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so. Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. When your Device is Wet Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center. FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for Wireless Devices The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices. When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate. The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on the box. The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not Health and Safety Information 303 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs. M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode. T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode. Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to interference noise. Under the current industry standard, American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and wireless mobile device rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a 304 hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two values equals M5. Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user with normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent performance. However, these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied. T ratings work similarly. M3 + M2 = 5 T3 + T2 = 5 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard. HAC for Newer Technologies This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer. Restricting Children's Access to Your Mobile Device Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your mobile device bill. Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection Association. Cautions Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device. Health and Safety Information 305 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it. Other Important Safety Information
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted.
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset.
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or accessories. 306
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes.
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device immediately. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders, or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]
Health and Safety Information 307 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Section 12: Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty What is covered and for how long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
(SAMSUNG) warrants that SAMSUNGs handsets and accessories (Products) are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date:
Phone Batteries 1 Year 1 Year Case/Pouch/Holster 90 Days Other Phone Accessories 1 Year What is not covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product. 308 This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft, blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential or transmission, or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified. What are SAMSUNGs obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at SAMSUNGs sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNGs sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing any Product, or may replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited. What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product and the sellers name and address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product. You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service. Warranty Information 309 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential What are the limits on SAMSUNGs liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNGS RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL, PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE 310 OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT. Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer, representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other persons or entitys Product or claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty. For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are
$5,000.00 or less (Small Claim), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (Large Claim) shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrators award in any court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNGs employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Products sale, condition or performance. Warranty Information 311 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchasers purchase of the Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: Arbitration Opt Out. You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found under Settings; (iii) on a label on the back of the Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchasers purchase of the Product and providing the same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty. Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty. Precautions for Transfer and Disposal If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software. To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsungs Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details. Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to Samsungs Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges may apply. 312 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC 1301 E. Lookout Drive Richardson, Texas 75082 Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357) No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without notice. [111611]
End User License Agreement for Software IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for software, owned by Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or electronic documentation in connection with your use of this device
("Software"). This device requires the use of preloaded software in its normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original. Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source licenses. The open source license provisions may override some of the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices section of the Settings menu of your device. Warranty Information 313 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is licensed, not sold. 3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation), or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software. 4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services related to the Software provided to you, if any, such as IMEI (your devices unique identification number), device number, model name, customer code, access recording, your devices current SW version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC (Mobile Network Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized 314 services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you. At all times your information will be treated in accordance with Samsungs Privacy Policy, which can be viewed at:
http://account.samsung.com/membership/pp. 5. SOFTWARE UPDATES. Samsung may provide to you or make available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and add-on components (if any) of the Software, including bug fixes, service upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices, and updates and enhancements to any software previously installed (including entirely new versions), (collectively Update) after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to all and any component of the Update that Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms along with such Update. To use Software provided through Update, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update. After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated Software version may add new functions and, in some limited cases, may delete existing functions. By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential While the Update will be generally available, in some limited circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by your network carrier, and such Software updates will be governed by your contractual relationship with your network carrier. With the Automatic Update function enabled (as in the default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting), your device downloads some Updates automatically from time to time. Your device will, however, ask for your consent before installing any Update If you choose to disable the Automatic Update function, then you can check the availability of new Updates by clicking on the Check Update menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of your device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for the Update downloads, then you should choose the Wi-Fi Only option in the Setting. (Regardless of the option you choose, the Automatic Update function downloads Updates only through Wi-Fi connection.) 6. Some features of the Software may require your device to have access to the internet and may be subject to restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider. Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi-Fi connection, the Software will access through your mobile network, which may result in additional charges depending on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of some features of the Software may be affected by the suitability and performance of your device hardware or data access. 7. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms. 8. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the Software, including all the applicable export restriction laws and regulations. 9. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the Warranty Information 315 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of the Software. 10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE (WHETHER INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN
"AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM 316 SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG. 11. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party applications may be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device. Samsung makes no representations whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for any content, advertising, products, services, or other materials on or available from such applications. You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on this mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its products and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or loss, including but not limited to any damage to the mobile device or loss of data, caused or alleged to be caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party content, products, or services available on or through any such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of any third-party application is governed by such third party application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will be subject to such third party application provider's privacy policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. 12. SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS. Certain Samsung applications and services may be included with, or downloaded to, this mobile device. Many of them require Samsung Services membership registration (Samsung Account), and your rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung Account terms and conditions and privacy policies. There are non-Samsung Account applications and services that require your consent to their separate terms and conditions and privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that your use of such applications and services will be subject to the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies. 13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING Warranty Information 317 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10, 11, 12 AND 13) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. 14. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"
and "commercial software documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19. 318 15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of the jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of the United States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without regard to its conflict of law provisions. This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of the Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction where you are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies (or an equivalent type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with any other persons or entitys claim or dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles, shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and Samsung shall pay the remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsungs employees, representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchasers purchase of this device. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: "Arbitration Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the device was purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not Warranty Information 319 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the device and providing the same information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of this license. 17. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect. [050113]
320 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Index Numerics 2-Sec Pause Adding 55 ABC 74 Accessing A Recently-used applications 45 Voicemail 23 Accessory 257 Dock Sound 257 Accounts and Sync Adding Contacts 98 Add 2 Sec Pause 58, 88 Add to Favorites 103 Adjusting Call volume 61 Adobe PDF 197 Alarm Deleting an Existing Alarm 163 Setting 162 Turning Off 163 Alerts Presidential 115 Alerts During Calls 253 Allow Diagnostics 19 AllShare Cast Hub 34 Activation on Device 155 Connecting 154 Set Up Hardware 154 AMBER Alerts 115 Disable 116 Android Beam 239 Answering a Call 56 Application cache and data Application Menus Clearing 196 Navigating through 44 Applications 41 Camera 160 Email 168 Google Mail 169 Google Maps 173 Hide 41 Apps messaging 176 Sharing with Others 47 Show Hidden 41 Shutting Down 24 Storage Used 278 Using the Camcorder 143 Using the Camera 135 Video 208 Adding 40 installing 156 Reset Preferences 278 Customizing 41 Output Mode 257 Configuration 56 Auto Reject List 252 Auto Reject Mode 252 Automatic Restore 269 Apps Screen Auto Reject Audio 321 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential B Back up My Account 269 My Data 269 Backup and Restore 269 Battery Charging 13 Display Percentage 15, 248 Extending Life 16 Installing 12 Low Battery Indicator 15 Removal 13 Wall Charger 13 Battery Cover Removal 9 Replace 9 Battery Life Extending 16 Battery Usage 279 Battery Use & Safety 293 Bigger Font Blacklist Setting 258 Adding 90 322 Blocking Mode 255 Bluetooth 223 About 218 Change Name 220 Changing Name 235 Configure Device Settings 222 Deleting a Paired Device 223 Device Name 18 Disconnecting a Paired Device Media Audio 222 Microphone Function 222 Off 219, 235 On 219, 235 Paring Devices 221 Review Downloaded Files 221 Scan for Devices 221 Scanning for other Devices 236 Sending Contact Information 223 Sending Contacts Via 223 Sending Namecard 95 Set Visibility 220 Settings 220 Status indicators 219 63 Bookmarks Switching to Headset during call Turning on and off 219, 235 Visibility 236 Visible Time-Out 220 Backing Up 272 Resetting Default Actions 279 Options 111 Burst Shots 136 Browser Bubble C Calculator 158 Calendar 158 Call Call Alert Settings 55, 56, 252 Call Vibrations 252 Call Alerts 252, 253 Call Answering/Ending 252 Call Duration 71 Resetting Times 71 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Call Functions 52 Answering 56 Background Calling 53 Ending 53 Ending a Call 53 Ending via Status Bar 53 Making a Multi-Party Call 64 Pause Dialing 58 Redialing the last number 59 Wait Dialing 58 Call Rejection 56, 252 Call Settings 252 Call Sound General 252 Adding More Volume 61 Personalize 61, 62 Call Status Tones 253 Call Vibration 252 Call Volume Adjusting 61 Call Waiting 66 Calls Auto Reject 252 Making a 52 Camera 134 Multi-party 64 Muting 63 Camcorder 143 Accessing the Video Folder 144 Settings 139 Shooting Video 143 Camera Options 136 Enabling Share Shot 145 Quick Settings 138 Settings 139 Taking Pictures 135 Care and Maintenance 298 Charging battery 13 ChatON 161 Children and Cell Phones 288 Chrome Buddy photo share 142 Google 161 Application cache and data 196 Clearing CMAS 115 Collect Diagnostics 18 Commercial Mobile Alerting Contact Configuration System (CMAS) 291 Initial 16 Connections Accessing the Internet 172 Copying to microSD Card 96 Copying to SIM Card 95 Creating a New 82 New From Keypad 84 Photo 150 Adding a Number to Existing 87 Adding a Pause or Wait 88 Adding Your Facebook Friends 98 Additional Options 99 Deleting 88 Display Options 97, 100 Displaying Contacts by Name 100 Entry Options 91 Export List to microSD 270 First Name 100 Groups 100 Contacts 323 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Import from microSD 270 Last Name First 100 Linking 91 List Options 89 Marking As Default 93 Menu Options 90 Merge with Samsung Account 89 Reject List 90 Sending All 94 Setting Default Location 89 Settings 100 Share Namecard Via 90 Sharing Settings 100 Sharing/Sending 94 Unlinking 93 Contacts List 52 Context Menus 87, 90 Navigation 45 Using 45 Copying Contact 95 Create Folder Group Apps 41 Creating a Playlist 180 324 Creating and sending Customizing Messages 105 Home screens 46 D Date Selecting Format 281 Date and Time 281 Default Storage Assigning 134 Camcorder 21, 134 Camera 21, 134 Multiple Messages 112 Single Bubble 112 Single Message 112 Deleting a contact 88 Desk Clock 162 Deleting Device Configuring 164 Reset 273 Device Name Edit 282 Display Device Options Screen 249 Icons 30 Settings 30 Status Bar 30 Dock Display / Touch-Screen 296 Displaying your phone number 52 Do cell phones pose a health hazard? 284 Sound 257 Downloading New application 194 Downloads 165 Draft Messages 106 Dropbox Uploading Picture 168 E Easy Mode 251 Edit Page 46 Editing a Picture 151 Email 118 Changing Signature 123, 128 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Composing 121 Configuring Settings 122 Creating a Spam List 122, 127 Creating an Internet Account 119 Internet Email 119 Opening 120 Refreshing Messages 121 Sending 99 Wi-Fi Download of Attachments 123, 128 Emergency Emergency Alert Emergency Alerts 115 Alert Preview 115 Alerts 115 Configuration 115 AMBER 115 Imminent Extreme 115 Message Settings 115 Severe 115 Making 54 With SIM 54 Without SIM 54 Emergency Calls 297 Emoticons 107 Ending Erasing Files A call 53 Entering Text 72 Using SWYPE 73 Memory Card 280 Exchange Email 124 Account Setup 124 Composing 126 Configuring Settings 127 Deleting Message 127 Opening 126 Refreshing Messages 126 Signals 284 Extra Volume 61 Extreme Alert Disable 116 F Face Unlock 242, 243 Facebook Personalize 262 Predictive Text 262 Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Swpe Connect 263 Facial Recognition 242 Factory Data Reset 273 Favorites Tab 103 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Prior To 270
(HAC) Regulations for Wireless Devices 303 FCC Notice and Cautions 305 Flipboard 168 Folder Create 40 Size 248 Style 248 Changing 258 Font Size Font Forgot Pattern? 245 G Gallery Folder Options 149 Opening 153 Volume 249 Games 325 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Getting Started 131 Battery 12 Battery Cover 8 Locking/Unlocking the Device 19 microSD card 11 SIM Card 10 Switching Device On/Off 19 Voicemail 22 Gmail 130, 169 Composing a Message 130 Creating an Additional Account Opening 130 Other Options 130 Personalize 262 Personalize Swype 263 Refreshing 130 Signing In 130 Viewing 131 Ads 169 Backing Up Settings 272 Create New Account 20 Settings 169 326 Google Signing into Your Account 20 Voice Typing 72 Google Books 185 Google Mail Google Maps see also Gmail 130 Enabling a location source 174 Opening a map 174 Google Music 187 Google Now 25 Adjust Settings 25 See also Local 173 Google Settings 169 Google Talk Google Places Google Voice Typing see Hangouts 132, 172 Configuring 260 Using 81 Settings 169 Google+
GPS 297 Group Joining 171 Group Play 170 Creating a Group 171 Dropbox 167 Joining a Group 171 Share Music 178 Share Pictures 141 Sharing Pictures 171 Groups Adding an Member to an Existing Group 101 Creating a new caller group 100 Deleting 102 Deleting a Caller Group 102 Editing a Caller Group 102 Removing an Entry 101 Settings 102 H Hangout 172 Health and Safety Information 284 Help Hidden Applications In-Device 172 Show 41 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Hold Placing a Call on Hold 62 Home 38 Home Key 38 Home Screen Assigning a New 47 Changing Wallpaper 50 Menu Settings 40 Overview 38 Home screens Customizing 46 I Icons Images Description 30 Indicator 30 Status 30 Assigning as a Contact icon 150 Assigning as wallpaper 151 Transferring 271 Verifying 271 Importing and Exporting To micro SIM card 100 In Call In call Options 61 Options 63 Indicator icons 30 International Call 57 International Calls Making 57 Internet Email 118 IP Address 281 J L Joining see Linking Contacts 91 Language Select 259 Latitude 175 Linking Contact Information 91 Live Wallpaper Selecting 51 Local 173 Location Settings 175 Lock Pattern Lock Screen 241 If I Forgot My Pattern 245 Changing Wallpaper 51 Say Wake-Up Command 242 Shortcuts 242 Viewing Missed Calls 71 Accessing 68 Accessing from Notifications 69 Altering Numbers 70 Erasing 70 Logs 68 Low battery indicator 15 M Making Emergency Calls 54 International Calls 57 New call 52 Clearing Application Cache 277 Uninstalling Third-party Managing Applications Market Applications 277 see Play Store 194 327 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Media Backing Up to microSD Card 271 Backing Up to PC 270 Erasing Files 280 Memory Card Merge Calls 64 Merge with Google 89 Message Options 106 Read 110 Register a Number as Spam 111 Reply 110 Thread Options 111 Threads 110 Message Search 113 Message threads 110 Messaging Adding a Signature 115 Adding Attachments 108 Additional Text 109 Block Unknown Senders 115, Creating and sending 105 117 328 Creating and Sending Text Messages 105 Current Message Options 107 Deleting a message 112 Draft 106 Google Mail 130 Icons on the Status Bar 104 Insert Smiley 107 Locked 106 Menu Options 106 Options 106 Scheduled Messages 106 Settings 113 Signature 115 Signing into Google Mail 130 Spam 106 Text Templates 118 Translate Text 108 Types of Messages 104 Viewing new 110 micro SIM Card 10 Importing and Exporting 100 Insertion 10 Removal 11 microSD Card Insertion 11 Removal 12 Mobile HotSpot 226 Microsoft Exchange 83, 118 Missed Call Viewing from Lock Screen 71 Activating 227 Allowed Devices 228 Changing Password 228 Connecting 228 MAC FIltering 228 Audio Setup 258 Mounting the SD card 280 Multi-Party Call 64 Dropping One Participant 66 Private conversation 65 Multi-party call Setting up 64 Mono Multi-party calls 64 Multi-Tasking Background Calling 53 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Music 177 Music App Adding Music 180 Creating a Playlist 180 Editing a Playlist 180 Making a Song a Ringtone 178 Options 178 Playing Music 177 Removing Music 180, 181 Using Playlists 180 Volume 249 Adding Songs to Playlists 192 Changing Library View 188 Changing Settings 189 Creating a Playlist 192 Deleting a Playlist 192 Listening 189 Now Playing Screen 190 Options While Playing 191 Playing 189 Playing a Playlist 192 Searching for Music 189 Tab Options 190 Music Files Removing 181 Transferring 181 My Places 174, 184, 274 N Namecard Navigation Navigating Sending 94 Sending All 94 Share Via 94 Application Menus 44 Sub-Menus 44 Through Screens 42 Enable Location 184 Go Home 184 Options 184 Network connection Adding a new 217 Downloading 194 NFC (Near Field Communication) 239 Noise Reduction 62 Non-Market Applications 196 New applications Notification Bar 36 Using 36 Notifications Volume 249 O On/Off Switch 19 Operating Environment 301 Organizer Other Important Safety World Clock 163 Information 306 Message 128 Settings 128 Out of Office Outlook 118 Overview Home Screen 38 P Passwords Pause Make Visible 275 Adding to a Contact 88 Pause Dialing 58 329 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Personal Localized Alerting Phone Personalize Network (PLAN) 291 Call Sound 61 Icons 30 Switching on/off 19 Phone number Finding 52 Phone Ringtone 249 Phone Vibration 250 Photo Photos Picture Editing 151 Change Player 141, 142 Options 141, 142, 144 Sharing 141, 142, 144 Color Correction 152 Face Corrections 152 Frame 152 Set As 150 Streaming from Gallery 149 330 Pictures Instant Sharing 145 Sharing 145, 147 Play Books 185 Play Music 187 Play Store 194 Pointer Speed Quick Access 41 Configuration 265 POLARIS Office 5 197 POLARIS Office 5 197 Power Saving CPU Power 256 Learning About 256 Screen Power 256 Power Saving Mode 256 Primary Shortcuts 40 Adding and Deleting 48 Customizing 48 Replacing 49 Q Quick Dialing 53 Quick Messaging 106 R Recently-used Applications Red Eye Accessing 45 Correction 152 Redialing the last number 59 Reducing Exposure Hands-Free Kits and Other Accessories 287 Reject Call Reject List Reject Calls Rejection Messages 252 Managing 56 Add To 57 Add to 69, 70 Adding 90 Auto Reject 57 Removing 90 Rejection List Assigning Multiple Numbers 57 Assigning Single Numbers 57 Set Up 252 Rejection Messages By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential remote control WatchON 210 Reset 273 Reset App Preferences 278 Reset Device 273 Responsible Listening 299 Restarting Device 19 Restore 269 Restricting Children's Access to Your Ringtone Mobile device 305 Device 249 Volume 249 S S Beam 239 S Memo 197 On 147, 239 Sharing Multiple Pictures 148 Sharing Pictures 147 Creating a New Memo 197 Translate Text 199 Translate Using Voice 200 S Translator Samsung Hub Samsung Account Samsung Keyboard 77 S Voice 200 Set Wake-Up Command 242 Using 67 Backing Up Bookmarks 272 Creating 21 Merge Contacts 89 Creating a New Account 202 Using 202 ABC Mode 79 Changing the Input Type 78 Enabling 77 Entering Symbols 80 Predictive Text Settings 261 Reset Settings 261 Settings 260 Symbol/Numeric Mode 80 Samsung Link 204 Sharing Media 206 Samsung Link Settings 205 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 295 Save a Number From Keypad 84 Scan for Nearby Devices 179 scientific calculator 158 Screen Screen Lock Pattern Home 38 Navigation 42 Screen Capture Taking a Screen Shot 150 Screen Lock Set Up 244 Sounds 251 Changing 244 Creating 244 Deleting 245 Forgot My Pattern 245 Activate on Device 155 Activation 240 On 155 Using AllShare Cast Hub 154 Auto-Rotate 248 Screen Mirroring Screen Rotation 331 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Screen Timeout 248 Screen Unlock Screens Face and Voice Unlock 243 Face Unlock 242 Swipe 242 Adding and Deleting 46 Customizing 46 Rearranging 47 Mounting the 280 Unmounting 280 SD card Sending a Namecard 94 Setting an alarm 162 Setting up Voicemail 22 Settings 139, 229 Call 55 Contact list 100 Display 30 Enabling the GPS Satellites 274 Enabling Wireless Locations 274 Messaging 113 Wallpaper 51 332 Setup Initial 16 Severe Alert Disable 116 Share Applications 47 Share Shot 145 Activate 138 Configuring 147 Enabling 146 Stop Sharing 147 Taking Images 147 Adding from Application Screen Adding from Home Screen 48 Deleting from a Screen 48 Managing 47 Primary 40 Micro 10 see also micro SIM 10 Shortcuts SIM 48 Smart Alarm 163 Smart Practices While Driving 292 Smart Switch 26 Snooze 163 Repeat 163 SNS 98 Social Network Song Sound Social Networking Software Update 281 Adding Facebook Contacts 98 Resync 99 Adding Contacts From 98 Wi-Fi 283 Set As 178 Adapt Sound 251 Turn Off All 259 Accessing Your Spam Folder 118 Add a Phrase 115, 117 Add Number 107, 108, 111 Assigning Manually 116 Assigning Phone Numbers 116 Block Unknown Numbers 117 Sounds Spam 118 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential 117 Block Unknown Senders 115, Email Addresses 122, 127 Manually Add a Number 115, 116 Match Criteria 117 Registering a Phrase as Spam 117 Settings 115, 116 Spam Messages 106 Assigning 106 Speakerphone Turning on and off 63 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information 289 Changing an entry 60 Making a call 60 Removing an entry 60 Setting up entries 59 Speed Dial Standard Limited Warranty 308 Standard Mode 251 Status Bar 30 Sub-Menus Navigation 44 Switching to a Bluetooth Swpe Swype 72 During a call 63 Backup and Sync 263 123ABC Mode 75 ABC Mode 74 Cellular Data 263 Contribute Usage Data 263 Entering Numbers 76 Entering Symbols 76 Entering Text 73 Gestures 264 Keyboard Mode 74 Languages 263 Select Text Input Mode 74 Settings 262 Social integration 263 SYM mode 74 Updates 264 Volume 249 System Tone Settings 250 System T Tethering Task Manger Overview 24 Active Icon 226 Disconnecting 226 see USB Tethering 225 Methods 72 Selecting 72 Create Your Own 118 Text Input Method Text Input Text Templates 118 Text To Speech 264 Text-to-speech Configuration 264 Uninstalling 196 Selecting 281 Camera 135 Configure 265 Time Zone TrackPad Tools Third-Party Applications 277 333 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Transferring Large Files 147, 239 Transferring Music Files 181 Translate 108 TranslateMessage Bubble 111 Travel Wallpaper Lock Screen 51 TTS 264 Twitter Personalize Swype 263 Predictive Text 262 U UL Certified Travel Charger 296 Understanding Your Device Back View 28 Display 30 Home 38 Side Views 29 Third-party applications 196 Blocking Messages 117 Unknown Numbers Uninstalling Unknown Sources 196 Unlock Using Face 242 334 Usage Unmounting USB Connections Using Voice 243 SD card 280 Battery 279 As Storage Device 225 As Storage Device 225 Activating 226 USB Settings USB Tethering 225 Use GPS Satellites 174, 184, 274 Use Wireless Networks 174, 184, 274 V Vibration Video Device 250 Sharing Videos 208 Volume 249 Options 142 Recognition 264 Voice Input Videos Voice Recorder 208 Voice Search 264 Voice Typing 72 Configuring 260 Using 81 Voicemail Accessing 23 Accessing from Another Phone 23 Setting up 22 Volume Settings Adjusting 249 W Adding to a Contact 88 Wait 58, 88 Wait dialing 58 Wallpaper Wallpapers Assign Home 40 Home and Lock Screens 51 Assigning from Gallery 142 Changing Home Screen 50 Changing Lock Screen 51 Changing via Settings Menu 51 Managing 50 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential Web applications Warranty Information 308 WatchON 210 Adding a New Room 214 Changing Channels 212 Configure Just For You 214 Initial Configuration 211 Locating Programs 213 Personalize 214 Settings 213 Using 212 enable downloading 224 Adding Widgets 40 Adding and Removing 49 Moving to a Different Screen 50 Settings 207 Stopwatch 164 Voice Recorder 208 About 216 Activating 216, 230 Advanced settings 218 Widgets Widget Wi-Fi Connecting to 216 Deactivating 218 Direct Connection 233 During Sleep 231 MAC Address 231 Manually Adding Network 232 Manually scan for network 218 On 216 Settings 230 Status icons 217 Wi-Fi Calling 10 Wi-Fi Direct 233 Activate and Connect 234 Device Name 18 On 146, 234 DST Settings 164 WPA2 PSK 227, 228 WPS PIN World Clock WPS Push Button Pairing 233 Connect 232 Pairing 232 Y YouTube 215 335 By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and ConfidentialLegal Notice 1. All functionality, descriptions, ideas, drawings, features, specifications and other information provided in this document are (i) Samsungs proprietary and confidential information, (ii) subject to the non-disclosure agreement regarding Project H and Project B, (iii) provided for discussion purpose only, and (iv) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third party. 2. Samsung reserves the right to make changes to this document, at any time, without obligation on Samsung to provide notification of such change. 3. Nothing in this document grants to the recipient any license or right in or to information or materials provided in this document, or any intellectual property therein. SAMSUNG PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL 4. THIS DOCUMENT AND ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN ARE PROVIDED ON "AS IS" BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER IMPLIED OR EXPRESSED.
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2013-10-17 | 1851.25 ~ 1908.75 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Original Equipment |
2 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
3 | 5755 ~ 5795 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
4 | 5510 ~ 5670 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
5 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||
6 | 13.56 ~ 13.56 | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Effective |
2013-10-17
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005810205
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
19 Chapin Rd., Building D
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Pine Brook, New Jersey 07058
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@pctestlab.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grantee Code |
A3L
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Product Code |
SCHR890
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
J**** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Title |
General Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
973-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
973-8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
j******@samsung.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
R******** O********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
6660-B Dobbin Road
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Columbia, Maryland 21045
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
t******@pctestlab.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 02/12/2014 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Class | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | DXX - Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Multi-Band CDMA/LTE Phone with WLAN, Bluetooth and RFID | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | No | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grant Comments | Power output listed is ERP for Part 22 and 27 and EIRP for Part 24. This device is approved for use in the handset described in the filing. SAR compliance for body-worn operation is based on a separation distance of 1.0 cm between the unit and the body of the user. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Belt clips or holsters not listed in this filing may not contain metallic components. The highest reported SAR for head, body-worn accessory, and simultaneous transmission use conditions is 0.67 W/kg, 0.57 W/kg, 0.77 W/kg, and 1.53 W/kg respectively. HAC Rating: M4 T4 - 2011 | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Output power is conducted. This device is approved for use in the handset described in the filing. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Output power is conducted. This device is approved for use in the handset described in the filing. SAR compliance for body-worn operation is based on a separation distance of 1.0 cm between the unit and the body of the user. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Belt clips or holsters not listed in this filing may not contain metallic components. The highest reported SAR for head, body-worn accessory, product specific (wireless router) and simultaneous transmission use conditions is 0.45 W/kg, 0.20 W/kg, 0.42 W/kg, and 1.53 W/kg respectively. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Power output is conducted. This device is authorized to operate with the specific handset described in this filing. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific configurations tested for this filing. Body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 1.0 cm separation between the device and the user's body. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR for head, and body-worn accessory, and simultaneous transmission use conditions is 0.26 W/kg and 0.19 W/kg, and 1.53 W/kg respectively. This device is restricted to indoor-only use for the 5150.0 5250.0 MHz band. This device complies with the Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) requirements of Report and Order FCC 06-96 as a Client only without Radar Detection. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | This device is approved for use in the handset described in the filing. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
R****** O****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
l******@pctestlab.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22H | HC | 824.7 | 848.31 | 0.078 | 2.5 ppm | 1M27F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 24E | HC | 1851.25 | 1908.75 | 0.122 | 2.5 ppm | 1M28F9W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 27 | HX | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.034 | 2.5 ppm | 4M50G7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 27 | HX | 701.5 | 713.5 | 0.027 | 2.5 ppm | 4M51W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 27 | HX | 704 | 711 | 0.037 | 2.5 ppm | 8M98G7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 27 | HX | 704 | 711 | 0.03 | 2.5 ppm | 8M97W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 22H | HX | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.014 | 2.5 ppm | 4M50G7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 22H | HX | 826.5 | 846.5 | 0.011 | 2.5 ppm | 4M51W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 9 | 22H | HX | 829 | 844 | 0.01 | 2.5 ppm | 8M99G7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22H | HX | 829 | 844 | 0.009 | 2.5 ppm | 9M00W7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0130000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC HX | 2412 | 2462 | 0.05 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.002 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 15C | CC HX | 5745 | 5825 | 0.019 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 15C | CC HX | 5755 | 5795 | 0.014 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15E | CC HX | 5180 | 5240 | 0.02 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 15E | CC HX | 5260 | 5320 | 0.02 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 15E | CC HX | 5500 | 5700 | 0.02 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 4 | 15E | CC HX | 5190 | 5230 | 0.012 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 5 | 15E | CC HX | 5270 | 5310 | 0.014 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 6 | 15E | CC HX | 5510 | 5670 | 0.013 | 2.5 ppm | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15B | 16 CC | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | CC | 13.56000000 | 13.56000000 | 0.0100000000 % |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC